Home

ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS Hardware Property Dialogs Manual

1. Gate The Gate control allows you to select a Properties x logic gating function With this function Amplifier ADC Stabiizer About Presets Off no gating is performed that is all E Gate Conversion Gain detector signals are processed with Off the function in Coincidence a gating input signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak detect peak maximum Real Time Live Time 10 00 0 00 Figure 199 MicroACE ADC Tab Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to 2048 the energy scale will be divided into 2048 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 2048 1024 512 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings 175 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 25 3 Stabilizer The MicroACE has a gain stabilizer gain stabilization is discussed in detail in Section 3 4 The Stabilizer tab Fig 200 shows the current values for the stabilizer The value in the Adjustment section shows how much adjustment is currently applied The Initialize button sets the adjustment to 0 If the value approaches 90 or above the amplifier gain should be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue to func
2. Client a Service Description 4 protocol is a language your computer uses to communicate with other computers Cancel Figure 22 Add a New Protocol 13 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Click on NWLink IPX SPX Select Network Protocol NetBIOS Compatible Transport Sy Click the Network Protocol that you want to install then click OK If you have Protocol then click on OK to Y an installation disk for this component click Have Disk return to the Local Area Connection Properties dialog Fig 24 Be Lasts Protocol a NW Link IP SPX NetBIOS Compatible Transport Protocol E This driver is digitally signed Tell me why driver signing is important Figure 23 Choose the Correct Protocol Select NWLINK IPX as shown then Local Area Connection 2 Properties f click on Properties to open the dialog N G icati Showa Fig 95 eneral Authentication Advanced Connect using BB 3Com 3C905TX based Ethernet Adapter Generic 2 This connection uses the following items 2 005 Packet Scheduler X NWLink NetBIOS NiWLink IP lt SPX NetBIOS Compatible Transport Prot gam 3 Internet Protocol IT CRAH et An implementation of the IP and SPX protocols which are used by NetWare networks C Show icon in notification area when connected Close Figure 24 LAN Properties 14 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CON
3. 11 Connections updates 18 A A aaa end 18 port 292 or page D conflict 214 Leakage current OCTETE 183 Low Frequency Rejector LFR 26 35 40 49 63 MBCA ers rat a Maks 188 POWER SlAMIS dra ett aes 190 Mark InSight mode iuris 84 4 ea 200 Master instrument list Vidas san 20 manual configuration 23 Watch Maker 4 53034 45 bth ud wakes 145 ADG TYPE 64 008 abet ede ke eaten 146 MCB Configuration program 20 manual configuration 23 MCBLOC32 INI manual configuration 214 MCBs DEG OLGA isa wh iba tee ta ets ace 166 DA ip bee O 168 OVS SEK CRS tala es 164 i be De be cree eee a eee E 149 II tpi st wee bad ole el ied Gol E 178 DA gs 724 ta aaa al 153 DO E E E EA 162 DI la es 140 92X A ee ae a ee ee E 126 ACE Ge A Gland Gul tints 166 DART tata oh aks 132 Deterioro 39 Detective EX ss la 34 dBASE cta taa 71 DARTE 95 DSE SCINU ir ds da 76 DSPE diarrea ias 117 DSPEC ID 0 decias diia abad 83 DSPEC 120 35 eri as 59 DSPEC PWS vajar eee 108 220 WIS PEC Pro ques oh Glace a beau tina 45 WIS GAY Seiten tha inh eg ce Url of lee ads So 188 Match Maket ip adas 145 Micro ACE ss dir dd adas 175 microBASE cdas 80 MicroNOMAD uri s 170 NMUMMCA Tobar ed 192 NOMAD NOMAD Plus 140 OCTETE PC OCT TE Plus 182 Spectr m ACE a he nest wine Gb A 166 ams PEC ec int dey eden Sh st gy und
4. When you are satisfied with the settings Close the Properties dialog and prepare to acquire data Once data acquisition is Close underway the advanced user might wish Figure 85 digiBASE Amplifier 2 Tab to select MCB Properties and switch to the Insight mode to adjust the shaping parameters interactively with a live waveform showing the actual pulse shape or just to verify that all is well 3 2 6 3 ADC This tab Fig 86 contains the Gate Lower Level Discriminator and meas Status Presets Upper Level Discriminator controls Amplifier Ampliier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage In addition the current real time and Gate E S live time are monitored at the bottom Enable Lower Level Disc 10 of the dialog Upper Level Disc 1023 The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating function With this function Off no gating is performed that is all detector signals are processed Real Time Live Time 0 00 0 00 Figure 86 digiBASE ADC Tab 72 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS When the Gate is set to Enable if the ENABLE INPUT is low lt 0 8V real time live time and data acquisition are stopped When the ENABLE INPUT is left open or forced high gt 2 0V real time live time and data acquisition are enabled If set to Coincidence when the ENABLE INPUT is low real time and live time operate normally but no counts are stored in memory If the ENABLE INPUT is high
5. 12 volts This is the current value of the 12 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 24 volts This is the current value of the 24 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 103 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual High Voltage This is the current value of the high voltage bias supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector Detector temperature This is the detector temperature at the time the current spectrum acquisition stopped This is available only for SMART 1 detectors Live detector temperature This is the detector temperature at the current time This is available only for SMART 1 detectors Battery voltage This is the present voltage of the internal battery Battery full This is an estimate of the amount of power remaining in the battery Battery time remaining This is an estimate of the time remaining when using the internal battery and the digiDART operating in the present mode 3 2 10 9 Presets Figure 121 shows the Presets tab MDA presets are shown on a separate tab Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report The presets can only be set on an Uncertainty MCB that is not acquiring data Aes ime Presetin TT during acquisition the preset field Live Time i backgrounds are gray indicating that Start Chan 0 they are inactive You can use any ROI Peak Widt
6. 3 2 8 4 High Voltage Figure 101 shows the High Voltage tab which allows you to turn the high voltage on or off The maximum voltage for the microBASE is 1200 V The high voltage is overridden by the detector bias remote shutdown signal from the detector high voltage cannot be enabled if the remote shutdown or overload signals prevent it Enter the detector high voltage in the Target field click On and monitor the voltage in the Actual field Click the Off button to turn off the high voltage 3 2 8 5 About This tab Fig 102 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selected microBASE as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the Detector is currently locked with a password Read Write indicates that the Detector is unlocked Read Only means it is locked 3 2 8 6 Presets Figure 103 shows the Presets tab A preset can only be set on a Detector that is not acquiring data during acquisition the preset fields are inactive gray 82 I x Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets Target 1200 Volts off Actual 1199 Volts On Close Figure 101 microBASE High Voltage Tab Properties O x Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets BAMBAM MCB 513 Sample Acquisition Start Time Access 14 22 22 Tuesday October 29 2002 Read Write Firmware Revision S
7. Detector State of Health reported as OK or ERR Detector Temperature reported as OK or ERR Battery Voltage reported in volts Battery Time Remaining in minutes Cooler Body Temperature OK or ERR Cooler Drive Voltage OK or ERR Cold Tip Temperature OK or ERR HV Bias in volts To resolve status problems refer to the troubleshooting list in the hardware manual For further assistance contact your ORTEC representative or our Global Service Center 3 2 1 10 Presets Figure 44 shows the Presets tab The Properties for transSPEC presets can only be set when the trans SPEC is not acquiring data during acquisition the preset field Amplifier Amplifier 2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report backgrounds are gray indicating that Real Time Uncertainty they are inactive You can use any or Presetin all of the presets at one time To Live Time A disable a preset enter a value of zero Ol Peak a a If you disable all of the presets data Width 100 acquisition will continue until manually ROI Integral stopped M Overflow Suages Region 2 When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first con dition met during the acquisition causes the Detector to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before countin
8. Update Description Defines a software interface and naming convention for Microsoft networking Cancel Figure 238 The Network Dialog Services Tab 217 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual If NetBIOS Interface is not shown it should be added To do this click on Add to display the Select Network Service dialog see Fig 239 Click once on NetBIOS Interface to highlight it then click on OK to add the service and return to the Network dialog Click OK again to close the Network dialog and finish the operation If you changed any of the settings you must restart the PC so the changes will be applied to Windows This is necessary before direct connect devices can be used 218 Select Network Service BEI Click the Network Service that you want to install then click OK If al you have an installation disk for this component click Have Disk Network Service FTP Server E Microsoft TCP IP Printing NetBIOS Interface E Network Monitor Agent E Remote Access Service y Have Disk OK Cancel Figure 239 Select NetBIOS Interface uACE see MicroACE o oo 175 UNOMAD see MicroNOMAD 170 DIG DIOL cds na AAA 166 MESA AA 168 DUG A AR 164 O IE in Scie en wk Roe Be 149 920 QQ0B ys oa es 178 digital Olla cios ewe es nes 178 921 ODE pus ek sere Sais eh ee wk Rove Be 153 DLO Skee eta mh
9. function in Coincidence a gating input Figure 180 TRUMP and 926 ADC Tab signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak detect peak maximum Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to 8192 the energy scale will be divided into 8192 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings 162 3 2 20 2 About This tab Fig 181 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selected TRUMP or 926 as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description 3 2 20 3 Presets Figure 182 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset
10. 0 400 Resistor Feedback Y Coarse Gain 4 00 r Shaping Time Pole Zero Start Auto the top of the Gain section The two controls used together cover the entire range of amplification from 4 0 to 1000 0 Needs Auto PZ Shaping Time Use the Shaping Time droplist to select the amplifier pulse shaping time constant Figure 156 92X NOMAD NOMAD Plus Amplifier Tab The available values Short and Long cover the time constants needed for high count rate and high resolution systems Preamplifier Type and Pole Zero The Preamplifier Type section lets you choose Transistor Reset or Resistive Feedback preamplifier operation The MCB amplifier is equipped with an automatic pole zero circuit If Transistor Reset Preamplifier is selected for this MCB the pole zero is not needed When the Resistive Feedback option is selected you must set the pole zero To do this go to the Pole Zero section of the dialog and click on Start Auto The pole zero command will be sent to the MCB If the instrument is able to start the pole zero a series of short beeps will sound to indicate that the pole zero is in progress When the pole zeroing is finished the beeping stops As with any system the amplifier should be pole zeroed any time the detector is changed or the shaping time of the amplifier is changed Pole zeroing requires the amplifier to be amplifying pulses The detector should be connec
11. 95 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual digiDART even when the power is off The time constant can be manually set on the InSight display see Section 3 3 You can view the time when the baseline restorer is active on the InSight display as a Mark region see the discussion on Marks p 200 In the automatic mode the current value is shown on the InSight sidebar Fig 227 For a low count rate system the value will remain at about 90 Preamplifier Type Use the Preamplifier Type section to choose Transistor Reset or Resistive Feedback preamplifier operation Your choice will depend on the preamplifier supplied with the type of germanium detector being used Optimize The digiDART is equipped with both automatic pole zero logic and automatic flattop logic The Start Auto optimization button uses these features to automatically choose the best pole zero and flattop tilt settings Note that if you selected Transistor Reset as the Preamplifier Type for this digiDART the Start Auto button does not perform the pole zero As with any system the digiDART should be optimized any time the detector is replaced or if the flattop width is changed For optimization to take place the digiDART must be processing pulses The detector should be connected in its final configuration before optimizing is started There should be a radioactive source near the detector so that the count rate causes a dead time of 5 Dead time is
12. Figure 36 shows the Amplifier 2 tab which displays the trans SPEC Rise Time and fixed Flattop Width settings You can also use the InSight Virtual Oscilloscope mode see Section 3 3 to view the digital signal processor s actual sampled waveform on a reference graticule 3 2 1 3 Amplifier PRO Figure 37 shows the Amplifier PRO tab which contains the Low Frequency Rejector LFR filter control This control is always on and cannot be changed Patent pending 26 Properties for transSPEC Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report Amplifier Amplfier2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage Flattop Rise Time Bao Width 0 80 lt Tilt 0 00000 H Pole Zero Start Stop H 277 InSight Start Stop Figure 36 trans SPEC Amplifier 2 Tab Properties for transSPEC Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report Amplifier Ampifier2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage V Low Frequency Rejecter Figure 37 trans SPEC Amplifier PRO Tab 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 2 1 4 ADC This tab Fig 38 allows you to view the MH ze conversion gain lower and upper level discriminator settings and monitor the current real time live time and count Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report Amplifier Ampifier 2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage rate The trans SPEC ope
13. s real time and live time are monitored at the bottom of the ADC tab Fig 189 Real Time Live Time 0 00 0 00 Close Figure 189 917 ADC Tab 168 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 2 23 2 About This tab Fig 190 displays hardware and firmware information about the ADC About Presets currently selected 917 as well as the ORSIMP4 MCB 1 Input 4 data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the MCB A is currently locked with a password AS Acquisition Start Time Access Read Write indicates that the MCB is LA Read Wite unlocked Read Only means It 1s Firmware Revision l Serial Number Acquisition Mode locked 0917 002 Unknown PHA 3 2 23 3 Presets Close Figure 191 shows the Presets tab The Figure 190 917 About Tab presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first ADC About Presets condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be Real Time useful when you are analyzing samples E of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before ROI Peak counting For example the Live Time pot integra preset can be set s
14. AA oe z Stop Auto ae Se Auto optimize button Fine 04672 SAA i Resistor Feedback m Input Polarity Coarse E gt oe NOTE The changes you make on this E i tab take place immediately There is no cancel or undo for this dialog Figure 113 digiDART Amplifier Tab Gain Set the amplifier coarse gain by selecting from the Coarse droplist then adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 45 to 1 00 The resulting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section The two controls used together cover the entire range of amplification from 0 45 to 100 Input Polarity The Input Polarity radio buttons select the preamplifier input signal polarity for the signal from the detector Normally GEM p type detectors have a positive signal and GMX n type have a negative signal Baseline Restore The Baseline Restore is used to return the baseline of the pulses to the true zero between incoming pulses This improves the resolution by removing low frequency noise such as de shifts or mains power ac pickup The baseline settings control the time constant of the circuit that returns the baseline to zero There are three fixed choices Auto Fast and Slow The fast setting is used for high count rates the slow for low count rates Auto adjusts the time constant as appropriate for the input count rate The settings auto fast or slow are saved in the
15. Canberra 34 pin including the S100 or 4 Silena For these ADCs all of the controls such as conversion gain or amplifier settings are in the hardware 3 2 16 2 About This tab Fig 163 displays hardware xi and firmware information about the ADC About Presets MDA Preset currently selected MatchMaker as well Matchmaker 14P as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the pe MatchMaker is currently locked with UCR E Acquisition Start Time Access a password R rite indi h ve e E d oli d 2 a 10 04 13 Wednesday January 26 2000 Read Write 1t 1s unlocked Nea niy means 1t 1S T y Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode locked MATC 003 14P PHA 3 2 16 3 Presets Close Figure 164 shows the Presets tab The Figure 163 MatchMaker About Tab presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled x set to a non zero value the first ADC About Presets MDA Preset condition met during the acquisition l causes the MCB to stop This can be 100 00 Real Time Tni useful when you are analyzing samples E Preset in of widely varying activity and do not sia ene Stat Char 0 know the gen
16. Detector is currently locked with a password Read Write indicates that the Detector is unlocked Read Only means it is locked 74 Properties x About Status Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer Presets High Voltage Target O Volts off Actual D Volts CN Figure 88 digiBASE High Voltage Tab Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage About Status MAIN_LAB MCB 130 Presets Sample LA Acquisition Start Time 10 53 35 Friday December 06 2002 Access Read Write Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode DBAS 001 8 PHA Figure 89 digiBASE About Tab 3 2 6 7 Status Figure 90 shows the Status tab The Aux0 and Auxl counters are reserved for future use The Enable Counter functions when the Gate function on the ADC tab is set to Event and the digiBASE is actively acquiring data in a spectrum Under these conditions the Enable Counter accrues the number of events at the ENABLE INPUT since the Start command was issued To clear this counter click on the Clear Spectrum button on the application toolbar or issue Acquire Clear 3 2 6 8 Presets 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS abilizer High Voltage Presets Amplifier Amplifier About i eoeed Enable Counter 0 4ux0 Counter 0 Aux Counter 0 Figure 90 digiBASE Status Tab Figure 91 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set on a Detector that is not acquiring
17. If changes were made you must restart the PC so the changes will be applied to Windows This is necessary before direct connect MCBs can be used 2 1 2 Windows 2000 Setup To determine whether the NWLink IPX SPX NetBIOS Compatible Transport Protocol is installed to add it or to select it as the default go to the Taskbar and click on Start Settings Network and Dial up Connection as shown in Fig 9 This will open the Network and Dial up Connections dialog shown in Fig 10 Programs Documents Settings Search Help Run Control Panel R EJ Network and Dial up Connections Printers A Taskbar amp Start Menu Eject PC Shut Down Figure 9 Starting Network and Dial up Connection ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual This dialog displays the existing connections If no network entry is shown install the hardware and follow the instructions for new hardware then return to this screen a Make New Connection AE Local rea Connection Enabled 3Com EtherLink III 154 3C509 3C509b in Legacy mode A Figure 10 Network and Dial up Connections Double click on the Local Area Connection 2x entry to display the status dialog as shown in cae Fig 11 Connection Status Connected Duration 01 43 12 Speed 10 0 Mbps Activity ae Sent 1 Received Ly Packets 3 246 3 444 Properties Disable Figure 11 LAN Co
18. Power About Presets When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing Real Time 7 P Live Time samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the rl Integral Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve Close Figure 218 M CA Presets Tab 191 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms s
19. Sample Acquisition Start Time Access Unknown Read Write Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode 0916 002 Unknown PHA Figure 187 916 916A ACE and Spectrum ACE About Tab or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak ADC About Presets Real Time Live Time ROlPeak ROI Integral FT Overtlow Close Figure 188 916 916A ACE and Spectrum ACE Presets Tab preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve 167 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware
20. Set the amplifier coarse gain by 2 selecting from the Coarse droplist then Figure 219 MiniMCA 166 Amplifier Tab adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 5 to 1 50 The resulting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section The two controls used together cover the entire range of amplification from 1 0 to 1000 0 192 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Shaping Time Use the Shaping Time droplist to select the amplifier pulse shaping time constant The available values Short and Long cover the time constants needed for high count rate and high resolution systems See the hardware manual for the specific time constants used Input Polarity The Input Polarity radio buttons select the preamplifier input signal polarity for the signal from the detector Normally GEM p type detectors have a positive signal and GMX n type have a negative signal Pole Zero This field allows you to set the Pole Zero to any value you wish much the same as with the old fashioned screwdriver potentiometer but with much greater reproducibility This gives you the ability to exactly set the pole zero for any detector to the value used previously ensuring data quality and reproducibility To see if the pole zero is correctly set collect a spectrum and observe the peak shape When the high energy side is Gaussian and the width is minimized the pole zero is correct Without an oscilloscope connected to t
21. The Center Chamnel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization 171 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or Amplifier ADC Stabilizer Field Data About Presets click on the Suggest Region button D eea Su est Re ion reads the osition of the JESS eee sae sae and seer values i the fields Center Char Jo If the marker is in an ROI the limits of width fi the ROI are used If the marker is not in ae an ROI the center channel is the marker A channel and the width is 3 times the Initialize 0 FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay active Figure 194 MicroNOMAD Stabilizer Tab even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 3 2 24 4 Field Data This tab Fig 195 is used to Enter and Properties Lx Exit the Field Mode remote operation Amplifier ADC Stabiizer Field Data About Presets detached from a PC or to view the m Move Spectra MicroNOMAD spectra collected in field mode The MicroNOMAD can only be 3 set in Field Mode by clicking on the Enter button on this tab and remains in Field Mode unit you return to this tab and click on Exit It cannot be removed from Field Mode when discon
22. at or below the throughput peak while achieving the best resolution obtainable from 208 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS the detector consistent with that requirement Enter the rise time that best matches your dynamic range of count rate note that the available rise time settings will vary by instrument this chart is a general guide only Table 4 Rise Time Selection Guide Input Count Rate Dynamic Range Throughput us The longest rise time shown in the table is 12 us even though some digital instruments can be set for rise times as long as 23 us If throughput is not an issue because all samples are low rate increasing the rise time beyond 12 us might achieve a small improvement in resolution For planar detectors such as ORTEC s GLP Si Li IGLET and IGLET X Series operating at longer rise times frequently gives improved resolution 3 9 The Nuclide Report The Nuclide Report displays the activity of up to nine user selected peaks Fig 231 shows a typical Nuclide Report tab Once the report is set up you can view the Nuclide Report at any time on the display of supported MCBs The peak area calculations in the hardware use the same methods as the MAESTRO Peak Info calculation described in Section 3 7 so the Nuclide Report display is the same as the Peak Info display on the selected peak in the spectra stored in the PC The calculated value is computed by multiplying the net peak count rate by a user defined constant If t
23. data during acquisition the preset field backgrounds are gray indicating that they are inactive You can use either or both presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable both presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the Detector to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting The values of all presets for the currently selected Detector are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Properties Ea Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage About Status e eee 500 00 Real Time 500 00 Live Time Figure 91 digiBASE The Presets Tab 75 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the Detector clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the Detector is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the Detect
24. normal acquisition occurs If set to Event rising edges are counted by a 32 bit event counter The contents of this counter can be monitored in the Enable Counter field on the Status tab Section 3 2 6 7 The input impedance is 5 kQ to 3 3V protected to 10 V The digiBASE operates at a Conversion Gain of 1024 only The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for storage 3 2 6 4 Stabilizer The digiBASE has both a gain stabilizer and a zero stabilizer their operation is discussed in more detail in Sections 3 4 and 3 5 The Stabilizer tab Fig 87 shows the current values for the stabilizers The rr value in each Adjustment section shows how much adjustment is Status Presets Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage f Zero Stabilization Enabled currently applied The Initialize IM Center Chan 0 Center Chan 0 buttons set the adjustment to 0 If the ia ob value approaches 90 or above the width fi width fi amplifier gain should be adjusted so rra uste the stabilizer can continue to function Adjustment Adjustment when the adjustment value reaches Initialize 0 Initialize
25. varied from the nominal value by more Figure 71 DSPEC Pro Status Tab than the allowed limit the ERR is set until cleared by the program The numeric values are displayed in the units reported by the DSPEC Pro Security Detector temperature and Live detector temperature are available only for SMART 1 detectors For non SMART 1 detectors they show N A ERR Power Failure Error 54 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS The parameters displayed are Detector State of Health This is OK if all the SOH are OK and ERR if any one is ERR DIM 24V State of Health This is OK if the 24 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 24 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 12V State of Health This is OK if the 12 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 12 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 12V State of Health This is OK if the 12 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 12 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 24V State of Health This is OK if the 24 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 24 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared Temperature State of Health This is OK if the detector temperature has stayed below the high temperature limit set in the detector since the last time the SOH was cleared This is available only for SMART 1 detectors High Voltage State of Health This is OK if the HV supply in the DIM has st
26. 0 100 the stabilizer cannot make further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization Figure 87 digiBASE Stabilizer Tab 73 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROL the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay enabled even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 3 2 6 5 High Voltage Figure 88 shows the High Voltage tab which allows you to turn the high voltage on or off and set and monitor the voltage Enter the detector high voltage in the Target field click On and monitor the voltage in the Actual field Click the Off button to turn off the high voltage 3 2 6 6 About This tab Fig 89 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selected DSPEC Plus as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the
27. 18 3 ADE aaa add aia 155 32 A84 PreselS A A IA 155 3 2 18 5 921E Uncertainty Preset ecncr nceresro arrasadas dede 156 3 2 18 6 921E MDA PESE AAA ha eee ee 157 3 2 19 TRUMP PCI di ds AA An badd 158 MITE ADCO dr a OBA ica ER RE euii 158 I9 2 DOU etarra ia eii ed datar 159 32493 Pres tS a dd a e ed be 159 A MDA Preset ide 161 3 2 20 TRUMP and 926 0 ta ake ba ee ORE RA we Re 162 3220k ADO ee cece on id ii ees ee ee 162 3 2 20 2 About 34 pr Bedi oo ke dodo dd dd 163 3 220 3 Presets A A a e ae a i 163 3221 DU si AI AAA A ee ea ee Eee ees 164 ERA ll A eee ead Abd eee ea aoe ESO ae eeee EET EET 164 Set Vig ta OU daa a ES E EERE EE RS 165 32213 PCSOs sas hich das SU Le ere ee ee ea oR 165 3 2 22 916 916A ACE and Spectrum ACE 0 00 ccc eee 166 3222 ADG vrs ee honk done EGR KONE EE ROR Gwe es 166 32 222 A ae dd ese eae ic ee ds ae a 167 3222 ICES sea inene wh A ee a Ree Ee 167 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3223 A II E O O O 168 ls ADO eins ra aid ei 168 J2 232 ADO oa AE A aes 169 a DOCS ae ii 169 3 2 24 MicroNOMAD 2000000 e A RA A 170 92 24d AUNQUE Parra 170 3 2242 ADC vespa ui aa de ea 171 a Stabilizer A ES RR das 171 3 2 24 4 A TERETE AES OE 5A EASES HTS 172 322A ADO Sh 2 bac a EPS SES ita 173 32 240 Presets 26 cb ed aeead heed kab head bo eee eee eee te aa 173 322D INTO te oe a deel A A al Wd 175 3 2 25 1 Amplifier atta case yang ae oa ee A 175 Oe ADE ot na hoe ak hae
28. EX operates at a fixed conversion gain of 8192 channels and the LLD and ULD cannot be adjusted 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Properties for Detective EX MCB 133 x High Voltage Field Data About Status Presets Amplifier Amplifier 2 Amplifier PRO Ape Close Figure 49 Detective EX Amplifier PRO Tab Properties for Detective EX MCB 133 x High Voltage Field Data About Status Presets Amplifier Amplifier2 Amplifier PRO ADC Conversion Gain 8192 Lower Level Disc ed a Upper Level Disc 8191 Real Time Live Time 0 00 0 00 Count Rate 0 Close Figure 50 Detective EX ADC Tab 35 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 2 5 High Voltage Figure 51 shows the High Voltage tab which allows you to monitor the Amplifier Ampifier2 AmpiferPRO abc Actual bias You cannot adjust the High Voltage FieldData About Status Presets bias voltage or turn it on and off these functions are factory set Target 2500 Volts off Actual 2500 Volts r Shutdown The Shutdown is fixed as SMART SMART El a reference to the Detective EX SMART 1 detector technology for more information on SMART 1 On deg ne see the ORTEC catalog or visit i www ortec online com and cannot be changed Figure 51 Detective EX High Voltage Tab 3 2 2 6 Field Data This tab is not used because there are no spectra s
29. Error presented OK or ERR and numeric e tat t value The state of health SOH are S ad all OK or ERR If the state is OK the z DiM 12 State Of Heath ERR parameter stayed within the set limits z DIM 12V State Of Health ERR during the spectrum acquisition If the S DIM 24V State Of Health ERR parameter varied from the nominal Eo Temperature State Of Heath ERA value by more than the allowed limit the ERR is set until cleared by the cl program The numeric values are a displayed in the units reported by the Figure 81 DSPEC jr 2 0 Status Tab DSPEC jr 2 0 Security Detector temperature and Live detector temperature are available only for SMART 1 detectors For non SMART 1 detectors they show N A 66 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS The parameters displayed are Detector State of Health This is OK if all the SOH are OK and ERR if any one is ERR DIM 24V State of Health This is OK if the 24 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 24 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 12V State of Health This is OK if the 12 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 12 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 12V State of Health This is OK if the 12 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 12 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 24V State of Health This is OK if the 24 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 24 volts
30. Fig 173 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selected 921 or 921E as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the MCB is currently locked with a password Read Write indicates that the MCB is unlocked Read Only means it is locked 3 2 18 4 Presets Figure 174 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set on an MCB that 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Properties x ADC Stabilizer About Presets ORSIMP4 MCB 3 921 Sample Acquisition Start Time Access 18 17 25 Wednesday April 17 2019 Read Write Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode 0921 004 Unknown PHA Figure 173 921 and 921E About Tab is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nucl
31. Figure 6 Enable NetBIOS over IPX SPX IPX SPX compatible Protocol Properties 24 x Bindings Advanced NetBios Click the setting you want to change on the left and then select its new value on the right Property Value Force Even Length Packets Ethemet 802 3 y Maximum Connections Maximum Sockets Network Address Source Routing Cancel Figure 7 Advanced Protocol Setup 2 1 1 3 Network Client If Client for Microsoft Networks is not on the Sola ok am list of currently installed network components click on Add to open the Select Network Component Type dialog Select Client and click on Add to open the Select Network Client dialog Fig 8 Click on Microsoft in the list of Manu facturers and Client for Microsoft Net works under Network Clients Next click on OK to return to the Select Network Client dialog Finally click on Add to finish the operation and return to the Network dialog 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION Click the Network Client that you want to install then click OK If you have m an installation disk for this device click Have Disk Manufacturers E Banyan E FTP Software Inc Network Clients E Client for Microsoft Networks El Client for NetWare Networks Have Disk Cancel Figure 8 Select Client for Microsoft Networks Click OK again to close the Network dialog and finish the operation
32. Figure 76 DSPEC jr 2 0 ADC Tab 3 2 5 4 ADC This tab Fig 77 contains the Gate xl ZDT Mode Conversion Gain Lower High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset Level Discriminator and Upper Level Amplifier Ampliier2 AmpifierPRO ADC Stabilizer ES o In pa the Gate Conversion Gain IGE 5 current real time live time and count Off v rate are monitored at the bottom of the ZDT Mode Lower Level Disc 50 3 dialog Off X Upper Level Disc 16383 Gate Real Time Live Time The Gate control allows you to select 5333 82 2759 16 Count Rate 12102 a logic gating function With this function Off ing i Lbse unction Off no gating is performed that is all detector signals are Figure 77 DSPEC jr 2 0 ADC Tab processed with the function in Coincidence a gating input signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 ns beyond peak detect peak maximum 63 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual ZDT Mode Use this droplist to choose the ZDT Mode to be used for collecting the zero dead time corrected spectrum see Section 3 6 The three modes are Off LTC only NORM_CORR LTC and ZDT and CORR_ERR ERR and ZDT If one of the ZDT modes is selected both spectra are stored in the same spectrum sPc f
33. Lower Level Discriminators In the DART the lower and upper level discriminators are under computer control The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions Setting that level above random noise increases useful throughput because the MCB is not unproductively occupied processing noise pulses The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions The lower and upper level discriminators are used in the multichannel scaler MCS mode as the single channel analyzer settings Only the pulses between these two settings will be counted in the MCS spectrum See the DART MCS A71 B32 Software User s Manual 134 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Zero Adjustment The Zero Adjustment is used to set the dc offset voltage on the preamplifier input The control ranges plus and minus with 2048 being O V offset The setting is normally O V or slightly negative Setting the value too far in the positive direction above 2048 can cause lock up by putting the input value above the pulse reset discriminator value A lock up has occurred if the live time stops and the real time continues to count The full range of offset is 125 mV Therefore a setting of 3100 corresponds to a zero offset of 64
34. MCB properties simply find your instrument s setup section in the table of contents or index click on Acquire MCB Properties move from tab to tab and set your hardware parameters then click on Close it s that easy Note that as you enter characters in the data entry fields the characters will be underlined until you move to another field or until 5 seconds have lapsed since a character was last entered During the time the entry is underlined no other program or PC on the network can modify this value 1 2 CONNECTIONS Programmers Toolkit Most users communicate with their MCBs through ORTEC software applications such as MAESTRO so direct interaction with the CONNECTIONS software layer is not necessary However we offer the CONNECTIONS Programmer s Toolkit with Microsoft ActiveX Controls A11 B32 for those who wish to write customized applications in Microsoft Visual Basic Microsoft Visual C and National Instruments LabVIEW that directly control ORTEC MCBs 2Also called the Universal Multichannel Buffer Interface or UMCBL 2 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION This chapter discusses the general workflow for installing CONNECTIONS 32 software and hardware including e Choosing the correct protocol for communicating with ORTEC MCBs over a network e Adding new CONNECTIONS 32 software hardware and driver updates to your system e Building the Master Instrument List from which you will select the MCBs
35. PROSE ESE EGER EA Es REGO REDE Ra RoE 175 200 Stabilizer ace Ode dE 176 3 2 25 4 About 4 6 ba we bk ae ee dins 176 3229 97 Presets garie An i da 177 3 2 26 920 and OZONO 178 Al ADCO ss e eee eae ees 178 32260 2 A DOUT een acta ce r A 179 Do TOOLS it da aaa oa 179 3 22604 920E Uncertainty Preset c lt u tecicedatedaccts ve de rre 181 3 2 26 5 920E MDA Preset sc occ adedecke Shsuvekee sebescduddeivane 181 32027 OCT IE PC and OCTE LE Plus es cerociso sra das 182 Ss ADC irradia 182 3 22 E Voltage esparto ata o a ai 183 O AD iaa rai e iaa a aa 184 A STATUS da ada air ad da 185 O LESS apra is ia o odie 185 3 2 27 6 OCT TE Plus Uncertainty Preset 0 0 000 0 cee eee 186 3 2 27 7 OCTETE Plus MDA Preset 00 00sec cece ee eee eee 187 3228 M CA ee eee ae a oe ere eee ree ee ee err do 188 A ays d ie nga cata eae A 188 IIA OO 86 ow Eh HARE weed HAE Hh eee eee 189 222203 HUBO VONAEe cv acentee este nr short bec EE e R 190 Ns ance edu ieee ete tena na eas eee ee ee 190 32289 OU asia ws ee a a a ae ee N 191 3228 0 Presets fae nk oh eae koa a asa 191 3 2 29 MiniMCA 166 Portable MCA 0 eee 192 3 229 1 AMPUTI tine 192 3 2 29 2 Amplifier 2 ale TE a ET 194 TABLE OF CONTENTS 32 29 AE NS ADN A E RAS 194 3 2294 Saber AAA ia e 195 32293 Hish Voltage a a re do Mess 195 3 2290 LOW A oa 196 A A a ada 196 LLO TOSS dE E AENOR 197 3 3 Using the InSight Virtual Oscilloscope 000 cece eee ae 198 Sel
36. Preset Coefficients MDA 120 0000 Bg a 0 000000 Nuclide Cd 109 y B 0 000000 Energy 2210 y keV C 21 700000 Figure 131 DSPEC Plus MDA Preset Tab Correction the efficiency Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset operates as before If the Correction factor is the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA preset will function normally 3 2 12 DSPEC 3 2 12 1 Amplifier Figure 132 shows the Amplifier tab This tab contains the controls for Gain Baseline Restore Preamplifier Type Input Polarity and optimization Be sure that all of the controls on the tabs have been set before clicking the Start Auto optimize button NOTE The changes you make on this tab take place immediately There is no cancel or undo for this dialog Gain Set the amplifier coarse gain by selecting x About Presets MDA Preset Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighYoltage r Gain 0 93 Baseline Restore Optimize 0 33 1 00 Jauo y Start Auto Oo te tet E TA Stop Auto m Preamplifier Type _Stop Auto_ ime 0 4650 Transistor Reset y Coarse a y Close Figure 132 DSPEC Amplifier Tab from the Coarse droplist then adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 33 to 0 99 The resulting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section The two controls used together cover the enti
37. SMART 1 detectors Battery voltage This is not used in the DSPEC Pro Battery full This is not used in the DSPEC Pro Battery time remaining This is not used in the DSPEC Pro 56 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 2 4 8 Presets Figure 72 shows the Presets tab MDA xi presets are shown on a separate tab Amplifier Amplifier2 AmplifierPRO ADC Stabiizer High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset The presets can only be set on a i an s ncertainty Detector that is not acquiring data Real Time O a wa reset mn 4 during acquisition the preset field ee lt gt ive Time backgrounds are gray indicating that Start Chan 0 they are inactive You can use any ROI Peak wiar or all of the presets at one time To ROI Integral disable a preset enter a value of zero Suggest Region If you disable all of the presets data J Overflow acquisition will continue until manually stopped Close Figure 72 DSPEC Pro Presets Tab When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the Detector to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample co
38. Tab integration time set on a conventional analog spectroscopy amplifier Thus a DSPEC Plus value of 12 corresponds to 6 in a conventional amplifier Starting with the nominal value of 12 0 you should increase values of the rise time for better resolution for expected lower count rates or when unusually high count rates are anticipated reduce the rise time for higher throughput with somewhat worse resolution 110 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Use the up down arrows to adjust the rise time within the range of 0 2 to 23 0 After all the controls have been adjusted return to the Amplifier tab and click on Start Auto The most recent settings are saved in the DSPEC Plus firmware even when the power is turned off For the more advanced user the InSight mode allows you to directly view all the parameters and adjust them interactively while collecting live data To access the InSight mode go to the InSight section on the Amplifier 2 tab and click on Start Note that the Amplifier 2 tab graphically presents a modeled shape This is not a sampled waveform of the actual pulse shape only a model based on the current parameters The modeled shape is nominally a quasi trapezoid whose sides and top can be adjusted by the controls in this dialog While a particular control is being adjusted the model is updated to represent the changes made The Rise Time and Cusp values are for both the rise and fall times thus changing the rise
39. The Polarity selection determines the output polarity on the rear panel connector 3 2 28 4 Power The Power tab is shown in Fig 216 This tab displays information about the M CA s current power source and the battery voltage The power Sources are Battery 1 or External 190 Properties x S Source External Battery Voltage 11 10 Close Figure 216 M CA Power Tab 3 2 28 5 About This tab Fig 217 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selected M CA as well as 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS as Amplifier ADC High Voltage Power About Presets BETTY M3CA Mcb 18 the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the Sample MCB is currently locked with a oros Acquisition Start Time Access assword Read Write indicates that P q 14 02 59 Tuesday August 29 2000 Read Write the MCB is unlocked Read Only r E ee is locke Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode means it is locked M3CA 028 17634423 PHA 3 2 28 6 Presets Figure 218 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped Figure 217 M CA About Tab Properties x Amplifier ADC High Voltage
40. The cusp value can range from 0 99 to 0 5 Under normal conditions the cusp value will be in the upper part of the range The Flattop controls adjust the top of the quasi trapezoid The Width adjusts the extent of the flattop from 0 8 to 2 4 us The Tilt adjustment varies the flatness of this section slightly The Tilt can be positive or negative Choosing a positive value results in a flattop that slopes downward choosing a negative value gives an upward slope Alternatively the optimize feature on the Amplifier tab can set the tilt value automatically This automatic value is normally the best for resolution but it can be changed on this dialog and in the InSight mode to accommodate particular throughput resolution tradeoffs The optimize feature also automatically adjusts the pole zero setting The Pole Zero Start button performs a pole zero at the specified rise time and other shaping values Unlike the optimize feature it performs a pole zero for only the one rise time The Pole Zero Stop button aborts the pole zero and is normally not used When you are satisfied with the settings Close the Properties dialog and prepare to acquire data Once data acquisition is underway the advanced user might wish to select MCB Properties and click on the InSight Start button to adjust the shaping parameters interactively with a live waveform showing the actual pulse shape or just to verify that all is well Section 3 3 provides detai
41. Width cannot be Curent 0 r i E changed 3 2 29 5 High Voltage Figure 223 shows the High Voltage tab which allows you to turn the high voltage on or off set and monitor the Polarity 6 Di Figure 223 MiniMCA 166 High Voltage Tab 195 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual voltage monitor the leakage Current show the Polarity and select the Shutdown mode Enter the detector high voltage in the Target field click On and monitor the voltage in the Actual field Click the Off button to turn off the high voltage The Polarity selection is an indicator To change polarity see the hardware manual 3 2 29 6 Power The Power tab Fig 224 displays the MiniMCA 166 s current battery voltage 3 2 29 7 About This tab Fig 225 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selected MiniMCA 166 as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the MCB is currently locked with a password Read Write indicates that the MCB is unlocked Read Only means it is locked 196 x Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage Power About Presets Battery Voltage 7 99 Figure 224 MiniMCA 166 Power Tab x Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage Power About Presets BAMBAM MCB 17 Sample ET Acquisition Start Time Access 19 18 18 Thursday March 23 2000 Read W
42. With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the Detector in which case that Detector continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this Detector marked with an ROI reaches this value This has no function if no ROIs are marked in the Detector 69 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample may be lower than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the
43. a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 21 918 3 2 21 1 ADC The 918 does not have computer E adjustable ADC controls The current ADC About Presets instrument s real time and live time are monitored at the bottom of the ADC tab Fig 183 Real Time Live Time 0 00 0 00 Figure 183 918 ADC Tab 164 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 2 21 2 About This tab Fig 184 displays hardware A a and firmware information about the ADC About Presets currently selected 918 as well as the ORSIMP4 MCB 2 918 data Acquisition Start Time a
44. activity and J Overflow do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time _ amp s preset can be set so that sufficient Figure 82 DSPEC jr 2 0 Presets Tab counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected Detector are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the Detector clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the Detector is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the Detector is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts
45. and Width cannot be changed 3 2 17 4 About This tab Fig 168 displays hardware xl and firmware information about the ADC Stabilizer About Presets currently selected 919 or 919E as well ORSIMP4 919 input 1 as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the STO q I MCB is currently locked with a vo ae Acquisition Start Time Access rd R rite indi h password Read Write indicates that 14 30 23 Sunday August 09 2020 Read Wiite the MCB is unlocked Read Only 7 ae rie lock Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode means it is locked 0919 006 Unknown PHA 3 2 17 5 Presets Close Figure 169 shows the Presets tab The Figure 168 919 and 919E About Tab presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of 150 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS widely varying activity and do not I x know the general activity before ADC Stabilzer About Presets counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient Real Time counts can be obtained for
46. and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROL the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command which is discussed in Section 3 7 Note that the Suggest Region button is not displayed during data acquisition 3 2 17 7 919E MDA Preset Tab The MDA preset Fig 170 stops data collection when the minimum detectable activity for a single user specified MDA nuclide reaches the designated value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammaVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA at b c Counts Live time Eff Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The Yield branching ratio is read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield The calcula
47. baseline of the pulses to the true zero between incoming pulses This improves the resolution by removing low frequency noise such as de shifts or mains power ac pickup The baseline settings control the time constant of the circuit that returns the baseline to zero There are three fixed choices Auto Fast and Slow The fast setting is used for high count rates the slow for low count rates Auto adjusts the time constant as appropriate for the input count rate The settings Auto Fast or Slow are saved in the M CA even when the power is off Pileup Rejection Pileup Rejection PUR is used to reject overlapping pulses improving the peak shape This checkbox allows you to disable the PUR This feature is normally enabled and is only turned off for special detectors 3 2 28 2 ADC This tab Fig 214 contains the Con xi version Gain Lower Level Discrimi Amplifier ADC High Voltage Power About Presets nator and Upper Level Discriminator Conversion Gain A085 4 controls In addition the current real z time and live time are monitored at the Lower Level Dise 100 E bottom of the dialog Upper Level Disc jos y Conversion Gain Real Time Live Time 25 00 25 00 The Conversion Gain sets the maxi mum channel number in the spectrum If set to 4096 the energy scale will be divided into 4096 channels The conver sion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 4096 2048 1024 The up down arrow buttons step t
48. can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Properties x Apc About Presets A LAB_224 MCB 7 Acquisition Start Time 07 44 36 Friday July 21 2000 Firmware Revision TRMP 001 Serial Number Acquisition Mode Unknown PHA Close Figure 181 TRUMP and 926 About Tab Properties x Resscsescossessseassed 5 00 Real Time 5 00 Live Time ROI Peak ROI Integral TF Overflow Close Figure 182 TRUMP and 926 Presets Tab for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog 163 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with
49. changed When finished with the changes click on Update Delete To remove an entry select the entry and press Delete When you close the Properties dialog all the values entered are written to the digiDART and are used when you view the Nuclide Report on the digiDART display 3 2 11 DSPEC Plus 3 2 11 1 Amplifier Figure 124 shows the Amplifier tab Ee x This tab contains the controls for Gain ay E MDA Preset Baseline Restore Preamplifier Type Amplifier Ampifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage Input Polarity and optimization Be r Gain 10 00 m Baseline Restore Optimize sure that all of the controls on the tabs 0 33 100 lao E Start Auto have been set before clicking the Start Dei ioe Auto pares Adie i T os000 iced all Fine j _0 5000 Resin resto Input Polarity Coarse k2 y Gt NOTE The changes you make on this n El tab take place immediately There is no cancel or undo Needs Auto PZ for this dialog Figure 124 DSPEC Plus Amplifier Tab Gain Set the amplifier coarse gain by selecting from the Coarse droplist then adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 33 to 1 00 The resulting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section The two controls used together cover the entire range of amplification from 0 33 to 100 108 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Input Polarity The Input Polarity radio buttons
50. click on the ached E a 2710000 l Suggest button to enter from an benggi mak B fooo0000 cues internal table the values for the MDA a kev c 21 700000 type selected The MDA type should be chosen before the preset is selected Lose here Figure 206 920E MDA Preset Tab Select the Nuclide and Energy from the droplists The Nuclide list contains all the nuclides in the working library The Energy list shows all the gamma ray energies for the selected nuclide in the library If the application supports efficiency calibration and the 920E is efficiency calibrated the MDA is entered in the units selected in the application If the unit is not efficiency calibrated e g in MAESTRO which does not support efficiency calibration the MDA field is labeled Correction the efficiency Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset operates as before If the Correction factor is the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA preset will function normally 3 2 27 OCTETE PC and OCTETE Plus The OCTETE Plus has more features than the OCTETE PC as explained beginning in Section 3 2 27 6 3 2 27 1 ADC This tab Fig 207 contains the Gate Conversion Gain and Digital Offset controls In addition the current real time and live time are monitored at the bottom of the dialog Gate The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating function With this function Off no gating is performed that is all detector sig
51. detector signals are processed with the Figure 115 digiDART ADC Tab function in Coincidence a gating input 304 92 295 40 98 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak detect peak maximum Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to 16384 the energy scale will be divided into 16384 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings for the digiDART Upper and Lower Level Discriminators In the digiDART the lower and upper level discriminators are under computer control The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions Setting that level above random noise increases useful throughput because the MCB is not unproductively occupied processing noise pulses The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions 3 2 10 4 Stabilizer The digiDART has both a gain stabilizer and a zero stabili
52. discussed in Section 3 7 Note that the Suggest Region button is not displayed during data acquisition 3 2 26 5 920E MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 206 stops data collection when the minimum detectable activity for a single user specified MDA nuclide reaches the designated value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammaVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA at b c Counts Live time Eff Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The Yield branching ratio is read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield 181 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The calculated value is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and when ADC About Presets MDA Preset it is lower acquisition is stopped MDA Preset Nuclide Update Die Deere Coefficients A B and C can be entered as numbers If the application such as GammaVision supports MDA paliene Paalis calculations you can
53. displayed on the digiDART front panel and on the Status Sidebar during data acquisition Select either the Resistive Feedback or Transistor Reset option and click on Start Auto The optimize command is sent to the digiDART at this time and if the digiDART is able to start the operation a series of short beeps sounds to indicate that optimization is in progress When optimizing is complete the beeping stops During optimization pole zeroes are performed for several rise time values and the digiDART is cycled through all the rise time values for the determination of the optimum tilt values As all of the values for all the combinations are maintained in the digiDART the optimize function does not need to be repeated for each possible rise time The optimization can take from 1 to 10 minutes depending on count rate You should repeat the optimization if the flattop width is changed 96 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS The effect of optimization on the pulse can be seen in the InSight mode on the Amplifier 2 tab Note however that if the settings were close to proper adjustment before starting optimization the pulse shape might not change enough for you to see In this situation you also might not notice a change in the shape of the spectrum peaks The most visible effect of incorrect settings is high or low side peak tailing or poor resolution 3 2 10 2 Amplifier 2 Figure 114 shows the Amplifier 2 tab which accesses the advanced F
54. entering the start channel and peak width for the peak of interest or 2 marking the peak of interest as an ROI positioning the marker in the ROI and clicking on the Suggest Region button If the marker is not positioned in an ROI the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM 205 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command as described below The background on the low channel side of the peak is the average of the first three channels of the ROI see Fig 229 l h Figure 229 Background Calculation Details The channel number for this background point is the middle channel of the three points The background on the high channel side of the peak is the average of the last three channels of the ROI The channel number for this background point is also the middle channel of the three points These two points on each side of the peak form the end points of the straight line background The background is given by the following 1 2 h pals gE 20 a i i h 2 6 where B the background area l the ROI low limit h the ROI high limit C the contents of channel i 6 the number of data channels used three on each end 206 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS The gross area is the sum of all the channels marked by the ROI according to
55. esotas trernen ENNS ERSTE ESSEER 89 229 eG oe a Gea pene eee Coun E E eee eee e eeeeseaes 89 A 92 3 29 9 MDA Preet E A E ses 94 32 10 MADART rt e RA E e ERA 95 3 2 10 1 Amplifier A 95 3 2 10 2 Amplifier A III 97 32103 ADC e eee e a oe ee a eee eee ee E ES 98 3 2104 SADC A psn tourer Eer aak EEn EEE 99 3 2 10 5 High Voltage occ coca eecerad eeaeeene Gounses Laake taaneus 100 A Held aa rip a seep isin ae eR aaa nee ea 100 3 22 10 7 ADO rr raid 101 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual US Sdn ia ER Ra 102 32109 Presets peveette ce da Gredes nEri seed HA the eeeeh a 4 TASES 104 3 210 10 MDA PESSEL cc apidtigcce tous ec AA 106 3 2 10 11 Nuclide REPO Esos ni coe ease Gos eM e Rae eaSe 107 32A ARS PEE PIS mer eane eee eee ee ere ea te debe 108 32 MA Amplifier netgear ete IA 108 92 AD Amplifier 2 sra date bee aeee eee Sunes Eo ed GEENE S 110 32 3 ADO ni tro redhead 112 LILA Hon Voltage serias AA 113 A SA A cies EPEn EAE TEER e esa 114 DMO Presets repita ls ve ape 114 3 2 11 7 MDA Preset A aera Bo none ees 116 Dee ISO Agee aon EEN le a ee 117 MA A vested ewan and aee Hest bea See henee Van hee oe beau 117 9222 A retenien Eere Ee Bete Cheeses 119 A nn S eu ehES HE ere ees 120 3212 4A SADIE eh ee enh ee ea ee ee eee eh ae ep Cae ets 121 22120 ESN Volt ge creia paras te bees 122 SN A A O 123 32 127 o A o E EESE a ee 123 3 2 12 8 MDA Preset sidra ni 125 alos NE tada e E il eee 126 3 2 13 1 Amplifier AA
56. flatness of this section slightly The Tilt can be positive or negative Choosing a positive value results in a flattop that slopes downward choosing a negative value gives an upward slope Alternatively the optimize feature on the Amplifier tab can set the tilt value automatically This automatic value is normally the best for resolution but it can be changed on this dialog and in the InSight mode to accommodate particular throughput resolution tradeoffs The optimize feature also automatically adjusts the pole zero setting 48 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS The dead time per pulse is 3 x Rise Time 2 x Flattop Width In the Pole Zero section the Start button performs a pole zero at the specified rise time and other shaping values Unlike the optimize feature 1t performs a pole zero for only the one rise time The pole zero Stop button aborts the pole zero and is normally not used When you are satisfied with the settings Close the Properties dialog and prepare to acquire data Once data acquisition is underway the advanced user may wish to return to MCB Properties and click on the Insight section s Start button to adjust the shaping parameters interactively with a live waveform showing the actual pulse shape or just to verify that all is well 3 2 4 2 Amplifier PRO This tab Fig 66 contains the x controls for the Low Frequency High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset Rejector LFR filter Resolut
57. function With this function Off no gating is performed that is all detector signals are processed with the function in Coincidence a gating input signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 ns beyond peak detect peak maximum ZDT Mode Use this droplist to choose the ZDT Properties for RANDT266 MCB 132 3 x High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset Amplifier Amplifier 2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer Gate Conversion Gain MEE Off Lower Level Disc 50 ZDT Mode 3 Off v Upper Level Disc 16383 Real Time Live Time 5333 82 2759 16 Count Rate 12102 Close Figure 67 DSPEC Pro ADC Tab Mode to be used for collecting the zero dead time corrected spectrum see Section 3 6 The three modes are Off LTC only NORM_CORR LTC and ZDT and CORR_ERR ERR and ZDT If one of the ZDT modes is selected both spectra are stored in the same spectrum SsPc file If you do not need the ZDT spectrum you should select Off In CONNECTIONS applications the display can show either of the two spectra Use lt F3 gt or Acquire ZDT Display Select to toggle the display between the two spectra In the Compare 51 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual mode lt F3 gt switches both spect
58. is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB 3 2 27 6 OCTETE Plus Uncertainty Preset The OCTETE Plus includes an Uncertainty preset on the Presets tab see Fig 164 page 146 for an example of this preset s data fields The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample might be better than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROL the start chan
59. list and return to the Network dialog 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION Select Network Component Type 24 x Click the type of network component you want to install Add Cancel Figure 4 Select Network Component Select Network Protocol x Click the Network Protocol that you want to install then click OK If you have ps an installation disk for this device click Have Disk Manufacturers Network Protocols Have Disk Cancel Figure 5 Select IPX SPX Compatible Protocol ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual On the Network dialog click once on IPX SPX compatible Protocol to highlight it then click on Properties This will open the IPX SPX compatible Protocol Properties dialog shown in Fig 6 Click on the NetBIOS tab then check the option I want to enable NetBIOS over IPX SPX Next click on the Advanced tab as shown in Fig 7 In the Property box click once to select Frame Type Open the Value field pull down list double click on the field or click once on the down arrow and select Ethernet 802 3 Check the option Set this protocol to be the default protocol Click on OK to return to the Network dialog Fig 3 L21x IPX SPX compatible Protocol Properties Bindings Advanced NetBIOS NetBIOS support allows you to run NetBIOS applications over the IPX SPX compatible protocol I want to enable NetBIOS over IPX SPX Cancel
60. of the high voltage bias supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector Detector temperature This is the detector temperature at the time the current spectrum acquisition stopped This is available only for SMART 1 detectors Live detector temperature This is the detector temperature at the current time This is available only for SMART 1 detectors Battery voltage This is not used in the DSPEC jr 2 0 Battery full This is not used in the DSPEC jr 2 0 Battery time remaining This is not used in the DSPEC jr 2 0 3 2 5 9 Presets Figure 82 shows the Presets tab MDA presets are shown on a separate tab The presets can only be set on a Detector that is not acquiring data during acquisition the preset field backgrounds are gray indicating that they are inactive You can use any or all of the presets at one time To 68 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS disable a preset enter a value of zero Properties for RANDT266 MCB 132 E xl If you disable all of the presets data Amplifier Ampliier2 AmpifierPRO ADC Stabilizer acquisition will continue until High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset manually stopped a rer Real Time When more than one preset is enabled al set to a non zero value the first Start Chan 0 condition met during the acquisition ROLPeak wah causes the Detector to stop This can ROI Integral be useful when you are analyzing Suggest Region samples of widely varying
61. off 1 1 us to 48 4 us e LFR mode on 3 0 us to 145 2 us Turning on this feature automatically sets the minimum protection time highest throughput rate based on your current Rise Time and Flattop settings however you can adjust this value at any time Each time you change the rise time or flattop the DSPEC Pro will automatically set itself to the new minimum protection time Training the Resolution Enhancer The resolution enhancer can help alleviate the low side peak tailing that results from increased charge trapping see the discussion in the DSPEC Pro hardware manual This function will not improve low resolution due to other causes and might exacerbate the problem 1 Set the bias gain rise time flattop and PZ as you would for data collection 2 If you wish to use LFR Mode turn it on 3 If you wish to use Enhanced Throughput Mode turn it on and either accept the automatically calculated highest throughput protection time based on the current rise time and flattop or enter the desired setting The latter might require one or more data acquisitions When finished proceed to Step 4 4 Clear the MCB and acquire a well isolated peak 5 You will now use the gain stabilization section of the Stabilizer tab to configure the resolution enhancer The gain stabilizer and resolution are somewhat similar in function and only one of these features can be used at a time Enter the Center channel and Width of the peak acqui
62. or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROL the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command which is discussed in Section 3 7 Note that the Suggest Region button is not displayed during data acquisition Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 11 7 MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 131 can monitor up to 20 nuclides at one time and stops data collection when the minimum detectable activity for each of the user specified MDA nuclides reaches the designated value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammaVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA a y b c Counts Live time Eff x Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The Yield branching ratio i
63. out 25 TRUMP sft wine bn ek bd e 162 TRUMP PCI an add 158 Memory page Dis o6 pene die kh twee bad 214 MICKOACE 35 ire 175 MNCTOBASE art ed a 80 MiIctONOMAD oir ohh et ee ebay 170 MianiINIGAR 1664 corso tery eed 192 Analog Threshold 194 battery voltage ess dla eds 196 Sienal Ronin drets 194 Network setup Windows 2000 vist ars 7 Windows 98 de 4 Windows NT rad das 215 Windows XP dado 11 NOMAD NOMAD Plus 140 OCTETE PC OCTETE Plus 182 chamber pressure arado doses 185 digital Oe e add 183 leakage cuenta id dde 183 uncertainty preset OCT TE Plus only 186 Vacuum Bias Interlock 184 O A heck aaa SG hele ab Ad 214 Peak Info calculation MAESTRO 205 Pileup reject marker casinos a ebay 200 Port 202 a bie lad ad 214 Pressure OCTETE 0000 000005 185 Resolution Enhancer o oooo o 50 SMART 1 detector shutdown mode digiDART 100 shutdown mode DSPEC jr 88 state of health status 89 102 Spectr ACE te ed cab So eee de 166 State of health SOH 89 102 As PEC e o BG nt 25 Amplifier PRO tabs evi bs eas 26 feldidata aid ia e as 28 Low Frequency Rejector LFR 26 NUCHIETEPOM 45 5 dare aa 32 state of health status 29 TRUMP Sucia ao ode edo Lola ata 162 TRUMP PCE os de EnA ata 158 ZOO Us ads ads 139 Vacuum OCTETE 0 00000 185
64. peak detect peak maximum Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maxi Properties taut panne ete or About Status Presets MDA Preset Ese to Plea te eno gy serale wii Amplifier Ampliier2 ADC Stabiizer HighVolage be divided into 16384 channels The gt conversion gain is entered in powers Pe Conversion Gain MEET 3 of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The Lower Level Disc fo up down arrow buttons step through Leva Laval Dis FESS the valid settings for the DSPEC jr pper Level Disc 16383 Upper and Lower Level Real Time Live Time Discriminators 14978 12 14976 62 Count Rate 0 In the DSPEC jr the lower and upper level discriminators are under computer control The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions Figure 106 DSPEC jr ADC Tab The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for storage 87 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 9 4 Stabilizer The DSPEC jr has both a gain Properties stabilizer and a zero stabilizer These are discussed in detail in Sections 3 4 A AAA gt Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage and 3 5 respectively See also Sodium Iodide Detector page 89 on the High Zero Stabliza
65. preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROL the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command see Section 3 7 Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 5 10 MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 83 can monitor up to 20 nuclides at one time and stops data collection when the values of the minimum detectable activity MDA for all of the user specified MDA nuclides reach the needed value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammaVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA a y b c Counts Live time Eff Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The Yield branching ratio is read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield The calculated value is c
66. reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 16 MatchMaker ADC Interface 3 2 16 1 ADC The MatchMaker ADC interface xi is used to interface standalone ADCs ADC About Presets MDA Preset from different manufacturers to the CONNECTIONS 32 software The ADC tab Fig 162 contains the Gate and Conversion Gain controls In addition the current real time and live time are ADC Type monitored at the bottom of the dialog SILENA y Conversion Gain Real Time Live Time 2 00 1 98 The Conversion Gain set here is the number of channels that will be displayed when this ADC is selected Close It is also the number of channels stored Figure 162 MatchMaker ADC Tab in the spectrum on disk Normally this is set to the ADC conversion gain selected in the hardware unit but can be different depending on the options available in the ADC hardware itself 145 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The ADC Type can be 1 ORTEC 2 Canberra 26 pin 3
67. rise time for better resolution for expected lower count rates or when unusually high count rates are anticipated reduce the rise time for higher throughput with somewhat worse resolution Use the up down arrows to adjust the rise time within the range of 0 8 to 25 6 After all the controls have been adjusted go to the Amplifier tab and click on Start Auto The most recent settings are saved in the DSPEC firmware even when the power is turned off For the more advanced user the InSight mode allows you to directly view all the parameters and adjust them interactively while collecting live data To access the InSight mode go to the InSight section of the tab and click on Start 119 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Note that the Amplifier 2 tab graphically presents a modeled shape This is not a sampled waveform of actual pulse shape s only a model based on the current parameters The modeled shape is nominally a quasi trapezoid whose sides and top can be adjusted by the controls in this dialog While a particular control is being adjusted the model is updated to represent the changes made The Rise Time and Cusp values are for both the rise and fall times thus changing the rise time has the effect of spreading or narrowing the quasi trapezoid symmetrically The Cusp value controls the curvature of the sides with larger values approaching 1 00 giving a nearly straight line shape for the rise and fall
68. so that dida sufficient counts can be obtained for Overflow proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the Close sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a Safety valve Figure 161 92X NOMAD NOMAD Plus Presets Tab 144 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel
69. stabilizer Gain stabilization is discussed Amplifier Ampliier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage in detail in Section 3 4 Bros hey The value in the Adjustment section DE shows how much adjustment is currently width 50 applied The Initialize button sets the Suggest Region adjustment to 0 If the value approaches Adjustment 90 or above the amplifier gain should Initialize 0 be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue to function when the adjustment value reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make _ Close further corrections in that direction The Figure 222 MiniMCA 166 Stabilizer Tab Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROI the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled xi checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until f en Power About Presets changed in this dialog the stabilizer Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage will stay active even if the power is turned off When on Tasa the stabilizer is enabled the Center Dff Actual 0 Vols Shutdown Channel and
70. standalone identifier all presets are cleared When the Identify button is pressed the Detective EX will always continue to take data until the Stop button is pressed When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the Detector to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected Detector are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the Detector clock incre
71. take place immediately There is no cancel or undo for these dialogs Gain Set the amplifier coarse gain by selecting from the Coarse droplist then adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 45 to 1 00 The resulting effective 59 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual gain is shown at the top of the Gain Properties for RANDT266 MCB 13200 xi section The two controls used together High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset cover the entire range of amplification Amplifier Amplifier2 Ampifier PRO ADC Stabiizer from 0 45 to 32 r Gain 1 00 Baseline Restore Optimize 0 45 1 00 T Start Auto Input Polarity _ Preamplifier Type Siop uto The Input Polarity radio buttons select Resistor Feedback Y p Input Polarity the preamplifier input signal polarity for Coarse MANN e Ft the signal from the detector Normally GEM p type detectors have a positive ai al signal and GMX n type have a negative signal Close Figure 74 DSPEC jr 2 0 Amplifier Tab Baseline Restore The Baseline Restore is used to return the baseline of the pulses to the true zero between incoming pulses This improves the resolution by removing low frequency noise from dc shifts or mains power ac pickup The baseline settings control the time constant of the circuit that returns the baseline to zero There are three f
72. the Shutdown mode The polarity is set in the DIM module The high voltage is overridden by the detector bias remote shutdown signal from the detector high voltage cannot be enabled if the remote shutdown or overload signals prevent it Enter the detector high voltage in the Target field click On and monitor the voltage in the Actual field Click the Off button to turn off the high voltage The shutdown can be ORTEC TTL or SMART The ORTEC mode is used for all ORTEC detectors except SMART 1 detectors use the SMART option for those detectors Check with 88 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS the detector manufacturer for other Properties detectors The TTL mode is used for AE ER gt UIRE ou atus resets TESE most non ORTEC detectors Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage The high voltage in the DSPEC jr is Taget 0 Vots supplied by the SMART 1 module or Actual 0 Volts Shutdown in a separate DIM The recommended TTL y HV for SMART 1 is displayed on the dialog For other detectors see the enan e a detector manual or data sheet for the correct voltage The polarity is determined by the DIM or SMART 1 module Off Overload Figure 108 DSPEC jr High Voltage Tab To use a Sodium Iodide Detector TAUER jr High Voltage Ta mark the checkbox This changes the gain and zero stabilizers to operate in a faster mode For the DIM 296 the HV is controlled by the adjustment in the Model 296 and not here 3 2 9
73. the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live 185 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count
74. the optimize function does not need to be repeated for each possible rise time The optimization can take from 1 to 10 minutes depending on count rate Y ou should repeat the optimization if the flattop width or the cusp settings are changed The effect of optimization on the pulse can be seen in the InSight mode on the Amplifier 2 tab Note however that 1f the settings were close to proper adjustment before starting optimization the pulse shape might not change enough for you to see In this situation you also might not notice a change in the shape of the spectrum peaks The most visible effect of incorrect settings is high or low side peak tailing or poor resolution 3 2 11 2 Amplifier 2 Figure 125 shows the Amplifier 2 tab xi which accesses the advanced DSPEC ra FREAR MDA Preset Plus shaping controls including the Amplifier Ampifer2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage InSight Virtual Oscilloscope mode see Section 3 3 m Rise Time Flattop 3 60 Width 0 30 4 re Y 0 00781 The many choices of Rise Time allow Cusp z you to precisely control the tradeoff foso H Pole Zero between resolution and throughput InSight Start _Stop Section 3 8 discusses this tradeoff and Start _ Stop eA contains a guide to choosing rise time according to count rate The value of the rise time parameter in the DSPEC Plus is roughly equivalent to twice the Figure 125 DSPEC Plus Amplifier 2
75. the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay active even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed If the Sodium Iodide Detector box is marked on the High Voltage tab the gain stabilizer adjusts the amplifier fine gain For germanium detectors the amplifier superfine gain is adjusted 135 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 14 4 High Voltage Figure 150 shows the High Voltage Properties LX tab which allows you to turn the high A AO el ee voltage on or off set and monitor the Amplifier ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage FieldData voltage select the Polarity choose the Shutdown mode and indicate whether isi i Actual O Volt Shutd this is a Sodium Iodide Detector Off ctuat 0 Vols u ORTEC y Sodium lodide Detector I Target 2700 Yolts The high voltage is overridden by the detector bias remote shutdown signal from the detector high voltage cannot Off be enabled if the remote shutdown or overload signals prevent it Enter the detector high voltage in the Target as field click On and monitor the voltage Figure 150 DART High Voltage Tab in the Actual field The limit is 5000 for Ge detectors and 1500 for Nal detectors Click the Off button to turn off the high voltage Polarity we CH Choose the Polarity with the and radio buttons the high volt
76. time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled x set to a non zero value the first Amplifier ADC Stabiizer High Voltage About Presets MDA Preset condition met during the acquisition l causes the MCB to stop This can eee be useful when you are analyzing Preset in samples of widely varying activity Stat Chan na and do not know the general activity ROlPeak O before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that ji sufficient counts can be obtained for Overflow proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve Figure 145 92X II Presets Tab 129 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when
77. time has the effect of spreading or narrowing the quasi trapezoid symmetrically The Cusp value controls the curvature of the sides with larger values approaching 1 00 giving a nearly straight line shape for the rise and fall The cusp value can range from 0 99 to 0 5 Under normal conditions the cusp value will be in the upper part of the range The Flattop controls adjust the top of the quasi trapezoid The Width adjusts the extent of the flattop from 0 3 to 2 4 us The Tilt adjustment varies the flatness of this section slightly The Tilt can be positive or negative Choosing a positive value results in a flattop that slopes downward choosing a negative value gives an upward slope Alternatively the optimize feature on the Amplifier tab can set the tilt value automatically This automatic value is normally the best for resolution but it can be changed on this dialog and in the InSight mode to accommodate particular throughput resolution tradeoffs The optimize feature also automatically adjusts the pole zero setting In the Pole Zero section the Start button performs a pole zero at the specified rise time and other shaping values Unlike the optimize feature it performs a pole zero for only the one rise time The pole zero Stop button aborts the pole zero and is normally not used When you are satisfied with the settings Close the Properties dialog and prepare to acquire data Once data acquisition is underway the advanced u
78. to choose the ZDT Mode to be used for collecting the zero dead time corrected spectrum see Section 3 6 The three modes are Off LTC only NORM_CORR LTC and ZDT and CORR_ERR ERR and ZDT If one of the ZDT modes is selected both spectra are stored in the same spectrum sPc file If you do not need the ZDT spectrum you should select Off In CONNECTIONS applications the display can show either of the two spectra Use lt F3 gt or Acquire ZDT Display Select to toggle the display between the two spectra In the Compare mode lt F3 gt switches both spectra to the other type and lt Shift F3 gt switches only the compare spectrum This allows you to make all types of comparisons Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to 16384 the energy scale will be divided into 16384 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings for the DSPEC Plus 112 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Upper and Lower Level Discriminators In the DSPEC Plus the lower and upper level discriminators are under computer control The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions Setting that level above random noise increases useful throughput because the MCB is not unproductively occupied pr
79. useful when you are analyzing samples of 173 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before Amplifier ADC Stabilizer Field Data About Presets counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient 10 00 Real Time counts can be obtained for proper eas Live Ti calculation of the activity in the sample ds with the least activity But if the sample ROI Peak contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be PAI iaga high resulting in a long counting time Overflow for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time Close preset the low level samples will be Figure 197 MicroNOMAD Presets Tab counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to th
80. value is normally the best for resolution but it can be changed on this dialog and in the InSight mode to accommodate particular throughput resolution tradeoffs The Optimize button also automatically adjusts the pole zero setting 3 4 Gain Stabilization ORTEC gain stabilizers require a peak in the spectrum to monitor the changes in the gain of the system amplifier The gain stabilizer controls the amplification factor of a separate amplifier so that the peak will be maintained in its original position The input pulse height to channel number relationship is 201 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Channel number Intercept Gain pulse height 7 where Intercept The channel number of the zero height input pulse Gain The relation between pulse height and channel number slope of the curve Changes in either the intercept or gain can affect the positions of all the peaks in the spectrum When used with the zero stabilizer both the zero intercept and the gain slope will be monitored to keep all the peaks in the spectrum stabilized The zero stabilization and gain stabilization are separate functions in the MCB but both will affect the position of the peaks in the spectrum The stabilization operates by keeping a peak centered in an ROI you have defined The ROI should be made symmetrically about the center of a peak with reasonably good count rate in the higher channels of the spectrum The ROI should be
81. you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 second
82. you to disable the PUR This feature is normally enabled and is only turned off for special detectors 3 2 14 2 ADC This tab Fig 148 contains the Gate Conversion Gain Lower Level Discrim inator Upper Level Discriminator and Zero Adjustment controls In addition the current real time and live time are monitored at the bottom of the dialog 133 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Gate The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating function With this func Power About Status Presets tion Off no gating is performed that is Amplifier ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage FieldData all detector signals are processed with Gate Conversion Gain EEF z the function in Coincidence a gating Off g input signal must be present at the ee 3 proper time for the conversion of the Upper Level Dise fan00 H event in Anticoincidence the gating Zero Adjustment fo 0000 input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The Real Time Ls Tie gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak detect peak maximum An external oscilloscope is needed to check this Figure 148 DART ADC Tab timing 2 28 2 28 Conversion Gain If set to 8192 the energy scale will be divided into 8192 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings Upper and
83. 126 A a E ee ee ae ee ee ea eases 127 A E AA 127 AN E A E cuseeeeEr are 129 DUNS De PISS coceectesd ceras rd bin 129 32 150 MDA Preset 333i tae koe abe aed do bates 131 ee OAT pte cash ata nd sb hes aot Adios DO 132 3 2 14 1 Amplifier o scrs oc une kedeeouste heey ook heeboeieeesenees 132 A AMO rt ee ee 133 D2 E 135 32 AA Hish Voltage sc ac 136 os Feld Dile rrsprrport edad bb ra aces 136 Os POWED oro AA an 137 A E es OU o PO ena ee Re EIN ET 138 A He ee a ae ee a eS 138 3214 9 PresS tS gote eau Gas oecu oOo ene peter eeu ke Hones ote eseas 138 3 2 15 92X NOMAD and NOMAD Plus 0 ene 140 3 215 AUPE ooh pce coerce tahoe A see ea eee 140 AN ADC aea poe Me NI ers ae ea es 142 TABLE OF CONTENTS A AI a a 142 DASA Hal Volt pe resi abr ende RA 143 J215 o AA A O eae ee EEE 144 3213 6 Presets ciar ia 144 3 2 16 MatchMaker ADC Interface ooooooocoorrorrrnonnon 145 3216 1 ADO rra rita ee ea 145 3 2 16 2 About 4 4 645484 rra dara the eee 146 SO Os Presets 4 ee eee Sans rias oa 146 3 2104 MDA Preset cra obese tert hee oboe de eee eee eeeease 148 3 2 17 919 and 919E da duties sh AAA AAA 149 EN AE AAA 149 SN AE A A Ee A E 149 Sd Stabilizer e ica 149 3 2 17 4 About eee 0s ek hh erstes Ts as 150 AN O AA PE 150 32170 919E Uncertainty Preset ss escaroir oler 152 3 2 17 7 919E MDA Preset Tab 4 ads 152 32 18 921 and OBTEN ir 153 oA A REN D OSTI EA P aran 153 EN A seerne eer E E RAE E RE 154 3 2
84. 167 shows the current values for the stabilizers The value in each Adjustment section shows how much adjustment is currently applied The Initialize buttons set the adjustment to 0 If the value approaches 90 or above the amplifier gain should be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue to function when the adjustment value reaches 100 the 149 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual stabilizer cannot make further correc xi tions in that direction The Center ADC Stabilizer About Presets Channel and Width fields show the a J Gain Stabilization Enabled 4 Zero Stabilization Enabled peak currently used for stabilization Center Chan 25 Center Chan 25 To enable the stabilizer enter the Width 150 Width 151 Center Channel and Width values Suggest Region Suggest Region manually or click on the Suggest os a A Region button Suggest Region reads ik 0 Initialize 0 the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROL the limits of the ROI are Close used Ifthe marker is not in an ROL Figure 167 919 and 919E Stabilizer Tab the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay active even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel
85. 176 contains the Gate Conversion Gain Lower Level ADC About Presets MDA Preset Discriminator Upper Level Discrimi Gate Seatac 4 nator and Zero Adjustment controls Ort p In addition the current real time and live Lower Level Disc 5 3 time are monitored at the bottom of the Upper Level Dise 500 4 dialog Zero Adjustment 0 0085 4 Real Time Live Time Gate 4101 00 10100 The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating function With this function es Off no gating is performed that is all Figure 176 TRUMP PCI ADC Tab detector signals are processed with the function in Coincidence a gating input signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak detect peak maximum An external oscilloscope is needed to check this timing Conversion Gain If set to 8192 the energy scale will be divided into 8192 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the instrument s valid settings Upper and Lower Level Discriminators In the TRUMP PCI the lower and upper level discriminators are under computer control The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a
86. 2 0 firmware even when the power is turned off For the more advanced user the InSight mode allows you to directly view all the parameters and adjust them interactively while collecting live data To access the InSight mode go to the Insight section on the Amplifier 2 tab and click on Start The InSight mode is discussed in more detail in the following section Note that the Amplifier 2 tab graphically presents a modeled shape This is not a sampled waveform of the actual pulse shape only a model based on the current parameters The modeled shape is nominally a quasi trapezoid whose sides and top may be adjusted by the controls in this dialog While a particular control is being adjusted the model is updated to represent the changes made The Rise Time value is for both the rise and fall times thus changing the rise time has the effect of spreading or narrowing the quasi trapezoid symmetrically The Flattop controls adjust the top of the quasi trapezoid The Width adjusts the extent of the flattop from 0 3 to 2 4 us The Tilt adjustment varies the flatness of this section slightly The Tilt can be positive or negative Choosing a positive value results in a flattop that slopes downward choosing a negative value gives an upward slope Alternatively the optimize feature on the Amplifier tab can set the tilt value automatically This automatic value is normally the best for resolution but it can be changed on this dialog and in the InSig
87. 2 mV 3 2 14 3 Stabilizer The DART has both a gain stabilizer and a zero stabilizer These are discussed in detail in Sections 3 4 and 3 5 respectively The Stabilizer tab Fig 149 shows the current values for the stabilizers Power About stas Pewee The value in each Adjustment section Amplifier ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage FieldData shows how much adjustment is currently T GainSiabiesionEnstled ZeroStebizaion Enabled applied The Initialize buttons set the Center Chan 25 A bs adjustment to 0 If the value approaches Width 50 Width 51 90 or above the amplifier gain should be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue Suggest Region Suggest Region to function when the adjustment value Adjustment Adjustment reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make kn 0 Initialize 0 further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization es Figure 149 DART Stabilizer Tab To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROI the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn
88. 2 tells how to select the proper network protocol for using CONNECTIONS systems over a network and how to build the master list of MCBs available to your PC from which you can then select the specific MCBs to be used in your application 1 1 Setting the Data Acquisition Parameters The MCB properties are generally setin A pal a dialog with multiple tabs as shown in Power Abot staus Presets Fig 1 The number of tabs and the con Amplifier ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage FieldData tents of the tabs are controlled by the ee A pe ee capabilities of both the MCB and the 030 1 00 e008 y Start Auto application program The MCBs have WA a feature status which the CONNECTIONS Fine 0 43975 Resi IZE software reads Only those features ls a Coarse Ix 20 y l supported by the hardware such as Preamplifier T ype __Stop Auto Input Polarity high voltage polarity are shown The Gli Si application software can suppress or oa A add tabs Support for the MDA preset depends on the application Chapter 3 Close shows the basic Properties dialogs the Figure 1 Example Properties Dialog common variations are described For the purposes of this manual when we refer to MAESTRO we intend it as a generic reference to your particular ORTEC CONNECTIONS 32 application software ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual To use this manual for setting your
89. 6 About This tab Fig 109 displays hardware Properties and firmware information about the A z z currently selected DSPEC jr as well aii ao a Tesi as the data Acquisition Start Time WILMA2 MCB 129 and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the MCB is currently locked with a Sample password Read Write indicates that the MCB is unlocked Read Only Acquisition Start Time Access 18 31 14 Friday July 12 2002 Read Write means it is locked Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode DSJR 005 P2 PHA 3 2 9 7 Status Figure 110 shows the Status tab Twenty one parameters are monitored Figure 109 DSPEC jr About Tab at all times Use the droplists to select any Six parameters to be displayed simultaneously on the Status tab normally these would be the six that are most important to you The items you select can be changed at any time Two types of status responses are displayed OK or ERR and a numeric value The state of health SOH parameters all respond with OK or ERR If the state is OK the parameter stayed 89 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual spectrum acquisition If the parameter a eiom ae ee ae Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage anta 7 E an ee About Status Presets MDA Preset more than the allowed limit the ERR is set until cleared by the program gt OK The numeric values are displayed in y DIM 24V State Of Hea
90. 919 and 919E The Model 919E has more features than the 919 as explained beginning in Section 3 2 17 6 3 2 17 1 ADC This tab Fig 166 contains the Gate x and Conversion Gain controls In ADC Stabiizer About Presets addition the current real time and live z Gate Conversion Gain 1024 time are monitored at the bottom of the Ott a dialog 3 2 17 2 Gate The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating function With this function Real Time Live Time Off no gating is performed that is all 15 66 12 58 detector signals are processed with the function in Coincidence a gating input signal must be present at the proper Figure 166 919 and 919E ADC Tab time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak detect peak maximum Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to 16384 the energy scale will be divided into 16384 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings 3 2 17 3 Stabilizer The 919 and 919E have both a gain stabilizer and a zero stabilizer on input 1 only Gain and zero stabilization are discussed in detail in Sections 3 4 and 3 5 respectively The Stabilizer tab Fig
91. A type should be MA a chosen before the preset is selected Conecton ms a 2710000 Nuelide Co 57 B 0 000000 Energy keV E 21 700000 here Select the Nuclide and Energy from the droplists The Nuclide list contains ee all the nuclides in the working library Figure 179 TRUMP PCI MDA Preset Tab The Energy list shows all the gamma ray energies for the selected nuclide in the library 161 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual If the application supports efficiency calibration and the TRUMP PCTI is efficiency calibrated the MDA is entered in the units selected in the application If the unit is not efficiency calibrated e g in MAESTRO which does not support efficiency calibration the MDA field is labeled Correction the efficiency Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset operates as before If the Correction factor is the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA preset will function normally 3 2 20 TRUMP and 926 3 2 20 1 ADC This tab Fig 180 contains the Gate and Conversion Gain controls In ADC About Presets addition the current real time and live Gate Conversion Gain HER time are monitored at the bottom of the Off dialog Gate The Gate control allows you to select a Real Time Live Time logic gating function With this function 2 28 a Off no gating is performed that is all detector signals are processed with the Lose
92. Amplifier Figure 213 shows the Amplifier tab E x This tab contains the controls for Gain Amplifier ADC High Voltage Power About Presets Baseline Restore Preamplifier Type UN Gain 4 00 m Shaping Time Input Polarity and Pileup Rejection 0 00 100 ISree El 5 or Input Polarity He a NOTE The changes you make on this z7 p Baseline Restore tab take place immediately Fat y There is no cancel or undo for Coarse xe this dialog Pile up Rejection T Gain Close Set the amplifier coarse gain by Figure 213 M CA Amplifier Tab selecting from the Coarse droplist then adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 00 to 1 00 The resulting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section The two controls used together cover the entire range of amplification from 0 00 to 64 00 Shaping Time Use the Shaping Time droplist to select the amplifier pulse shaping time constant The available values Short and Long cover the time constants needed for high count rate and high resolution systems Input Polarity The Input Polarity radio buttons select the preamplifier input signal polarity for the signal from the detector Normally GEM p type detectors have a positive signal and GMX n type have a negative signal 188 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Baseline Restore The Baseline Restore is used to return the
93. Detector mark the checkbox This changes the gain and zero stabilizers to operate in a faster mode For the DIM 296 the HV is controlled by the adjustment in the Model 296 and not here 3 2 5 7 About This tab Fig 80 displays hardware EA NNN 3x and firmware information about the Amplifier Ampifier2 Ampifier PRO ADC Stabilizer currently selected DSPEC jr 2 0 as High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset well as the data Acquisition Start RANDT266 MCB 132 Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows n ample whether the Detector is currently A locked with a password Read Write E Acquisition Start Time Access indicates that the Detector 18 unlocked 15 09 06 Monday September 22 2003 Read Write Read Only means it is locked Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode DSJ2 001 00123 PHA 3 2 5 8 Status Figure 81 shows the Status tab There are 21 values monitored at all times You can select any six of these to be displayed simultaneously on the Status tab You would normally pick the six Figure 80 DSPEC jr 2 0 About Tab that are most important to you The Properties for RANDT266 MCB 132 E xj values you select can be changed at Amplifier Amplifier2 AmplfierPRO ADC Stabilizer any time so you can view any of them High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset as needed Two types of values are Ac ERR Power Failure
94. ECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 9 9 MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 112 can monitor up to 20 nuclides at one time and stops data collection when the minimum detectable activity for each of the user specified MDA nuclides reaches the designated value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammaVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA a y b cxCounts Live time Eff Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The Yield branching ratio is read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield The calculated value is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition is stopped Coefficients A B and C can be Properties entered as numbers If the applica tion such as GammaVision supports MDA calculations you can click on the Suggest button to enter from an internal table the values for the MDA type selected The MDA type should Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage About Status Pre
95. Energy Gain ranges The energy range can be the same MeV MeV for all inputs different for all inputs or any 30 55 2048 combination in between Each input has its own energy calibration in the system These are only examples any other combination 3 0 8 0 1024 4 0 6 5 2048 can be used 4 0 9 0 1024 5 0 7 5 2048 3 2 27 2 High Voltage 6 0 8 5 2048 Figure 208 shows the High Voltage tab Spectrum size is 512 channels which allows you to turn the MCB bias on or off and monitor the MCB voltage Actual and leakage Current To change the total memory size or enable the second set of eight inputs in the OCT TE Plus see the hardware manual and the SET920 program for details After any changes to these settings you must run the MCB Configuration program to register the changes see Section 2 4 183 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The OCT TE PC has a rear panel Vacuum Bias Interlock switch that can disabled the bias when chamber pressure rises above the cutoff value When the cutoff value is exceeded and the interlock shuts off the bias the dialog s On button remains in the on depressed position In this condition bias will be automatically reapplied when the vacuum improves sufficiently or the interlock switch is set to off When the bias is on the detector leakage current is shown in the Current field The leakage current is detector dependent and wil
96. FIGURATION Set the Frame type to 802 3 as shown then NWLink IPX SPX NetBIOS Compatible Transp 1 click on OK Close and Close to return to the Windows desktop EEE General Specify an internal network number if you plan to run File and Print Services for NetWare IP routing or any other NetWare service that relies on the SAP Agent This number applies to all connections on this computer that use such services Internal network number 0000000 Adapter In most cases you should choose Auto Detect You should manually configure the Frame type and Network number only if Auto Detect does not work in your enviroment Frame type Ethernet 802 3 v Network number 0000000 Figure 25 Choose the Correct Frame Type 2 2 Adding New CONNECTIONS 32 Software Hardware and Driver Updates to Your System The instructions in this section are generalized and will apply in most cases However to guarantee best results use the installation instructions provided with your software or hardware product NOTE For systems using Windows 2000 or XP ORTEC CONNECTIONS 32 software products are designed to operate correctly only for users with full Administrator privileges Limiting user privileges could cause unexpected results 2 2 1 Installing a New Software Application 1 Insert the application CD If it does not autorun go to the Windows Taskbar and click on Start then Run In the Run dialog enter D
97. HighVoltage condition met during the acquisition About Era Presets MDA Preset causes the MCB to stop This can be ineat useful when you are analyzing samples pa e y j a ZE p Preset in of widely varying activity and do not 100000 Live Time know the general activity before Start Chan 150 counting For example the Live Time ROI Pesk width roo preset can be set so that sufficient PRO Integral counts can be obtained for proper Suggest Region SN M Overflow calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large an of this or EZ another nuclide the dead time could be Figure 130 DSPEC Plus Presets Tab high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Re
98. IDA PRS Cp sagas A E oe a ee 31 5 241 12 Nuclide Report 2 cco soe cane ees orcos arras eee 32 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 32 MEE A E AAA ee ee eee 34 UA E A 34 A A Soren TEREE 34 3 2 2 3 Amplifier PRO 2 4 9 cx endo ae ane ea Re ES ee 35 J22 PDC beak ed eae ee a a a aie 35 3 22 93 CN Voltage 24 gates ote Bea eee eeu ee eens ote eens 36 A AA 36 322 TADOU iae II ee E EE 36 A A aa a ea a a ees 37 Oe VIGsES apacieevacectsee E E EEE EE AE e AE 38 3 23 IA a a E ese ees 39 E AMPUI aeaea A E nea 39 A Ea eS 40 3 2 3 3 Amplifier PRO sissccsescseresessrsrorerarerisnr rastisur 40 I2 A A O E E A care EE 41 3 23 93 Hio h VONAGE 295 a5 oS hdd ehh oN EAE Sa a Res 41 3 2 3 0 A ee sg wag ae ye ae Baars 41 32 3 ls AQUA 43 A A ee e e e RA E e E eE 43 ee ES aspror mat vend dor no ace E EAE E EE E E E 44 3 2 4 Ds ed ol ON Cc OE ee ee eee ee Tee ee ee dis ee eee eee ee ee 45 924 5 ampliar terceras prisa 45 3 2 4 2 Amplifier A coteueda be eensa gestetetunsceeeaues ees 49 A pre eg tee ee are 51 32 4 4 Stabilizer serio di ia pidi da lod ia ici 32 A A II E A a 53 D240 ADOUL cortar rr rd AE REEE 54 J2 AT SaS o ads E ag a eas 54 Oe ic Presets E Es a 57 3 2 4 9 MDA Preset A A 58 323 DSPEC J20 sata nie lil or ia e E 59 A ae a dee a a 59 3 2 5 2 A en ee 61 32 3 Amplifier PRO certo vincre rd eainiie di ei 63 o O A E ES TN 63 3 2 5 5 AZ oa ES 64 3 2 5 6 High A II AES 65 2 ADOI nae Bota eG eee eee p
99. Info command see Section 3 7 Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 4 9 MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 73 can monitor up to 20 nuclides at one time and stops data collection when the values of the minimum detectable activity MDA for all of the user specified MDA nuclides reach the needed value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammavVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA at b c Counts Live time Eff Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The Yield branching ratio is read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield 58 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS The calculated value is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition is stopped Coefficients A B and C can be entered as numbers If the application such as GammaVision supports MDA calculations you can click on the Suggest button to enter from an internal table th
100. Level Discriminator controls In addition the current real time live time and count rate are monitored at the bottom of the dialog Power About Presets Amplifier Amplifier 2 ADC Stabilizer L High Voltage Lower Level Disc fo 3 Conversion Gain Conversion Gain Upper Level Disc 991 The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to ae O E gal ime ve lime 4096 the energy scale will be divided T LUMEN O into 4096 channels The conversion gain 1s entered in powers of 2 e g 4096 Close 2048 1024 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings Figure 221 MiniMCA 166 ADC Tab Upper and Lower Level Discriminators In the MiniMCA 166 the lower and upper level discriminators are under computer control The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions Setting that level above random noise increases useful throughput because the MCB is not 194 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS unproductively occupied processing noise pulses The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions 3 2 29 4 Stabilizer The Stabilizer tab Fig 222 allows xl you to control the MiniMCA 166 gain Power ra Presets
101. MCB is unlocked E Acquisition Start Time Access Read Only means it is locked 14 10 29 Friday August 23 2002 Read Write Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode This screen displays the DART s serial DART 012 P 26 PHA number all DARTs have a unique serial number which is read by the software and stored in the spectrum file Figure 153 DART About Tab for verification of the spectrum The PC to which the DART is attached is shown at the top of the dialog 3 2 14 8 Status The DART can monitor a thermistor usually located on a Nal detector The Thermistor reading shown on the Status tab Fig 154 is in ohms This can be used by other programs to monitor the gain of the photomultiplier tube 3 2 14 9 Presets Figure 155 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data Use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped 138 When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the l
102. OH was cleared DIM 12V State of Health This is OK if the 12 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 12 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared 102 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS DIM 24V State of Health This is OK if the 24 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 24 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared Temperature State of Health This is OK if the detector temperature has stayed below the high temperature limit set in the detector since the last time the SOH was cleared This is available only for SMART 1 detectors High Voltage State of Health This is OK if the HV supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 V of specified bias voltage since the last time the SOH was cleared Shutdown State of Health This is OK if the detector shutdown has not activated since the last time the SOH was cleared Preamplifier overload State of Health This is OK if the preamplifier overload has not activated since the last time the SOH was cleared Security State of Health This is OK if the security test was passed at the end of the last spectrum acquisition This is available only for SMART 1 detectors Power State of Health This is OK if the power to the DIM was constant during the last spectrum acquisition 24 volts This is the current value of the 24 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 12 volts This is the current value of the 12 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector
103. ORTEC ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Software Version 6 04 Printed in U S A ORTEC Part No 931001 1004 Manual Revision D Advanced Measurement Technology Inc a k a ORTEC a subsidiary of AMETEK Inc WARRANTY ORTEC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE NOT EXPRESSLY SET FORTH HEREIN IN NO EVENT WILL ORTEC BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVINGS EVEN IF ORTEC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THESE DATA Copyright 2004 Advanced Measurement Technology Inc All rights reserved ORTEC is a registered trademark of Advanced Measurement Technology Inc All other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners L 2 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION sscuasorososionnsstra eres yet paa ERASE 1 1 1 Setting the Data Acquisition Parameters 0 cece eee eee 1 1 2 CONNECTIONS Programmer s TOOMKIC 2 655 0i i 29 ease ed decane oSed eae C28 ES es 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION 0 0 000 ce ee eee 3 2 1 Setting Up the Network Protocol ramiro a ds 3 2 1 1 Windows 98 SE Network Setup o ooo ooocconconccncor eens 4 AA 5 A A A O eee r enere n enren ds 5 2 1 1 3 Network C
104. PEC jr having controls including the InSight About Status Presets MDA Preset 3 ap 8 8 8 Amplifier Amplifier 2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage Virtual Oscilloscope mode which is ae discussed in Section 3 3 eles Bis fizco Width foso Y The many choices of Rise Time allow E you to precisely control the tradeoff between resolution and throughput Section 3 8 discusses this a and oa ae se contains a guide to choosing rise time Start _stop according to count rate The value of the rise time parameter in the DSPEC jr is roughly equivalent to twice the integration time set on a conventional analog spectroscopy amplifier Thus a DSPEC jr value of 12 corresponds to 6 in a conventional amplifier Starting with the nominal value of 12 0 you should increase values of the rise time for better resolution for expected lower count rates or when unusually high count rates are anticipated reduce the rise time for higher throughput with somewhat worse resolution Pole Zero Figure 105 DSPEC jr Amplifier 2 Tab 85 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Use the up down arrows to adjust the rise time within the range of 0 2 to 23 0 After all the controls have been adjusted return to the Amplifier tab and click on Start Auto The most recent settings are saved in the DSPEC jr firmware even when the power is turned off For the more advanced user the InSight mode allows you to directly view all the
105. Property Dialogs Manual The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 23 917 3 2 23 1 ADC The 917 does not have computer adjustable ADC controls The current CADE About Presets Jeessescensensensend instrument
106. Serial Number Acquisition Mode 0920 006 Unknown PHA Close Figure 204 920 and 920E About Tab is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter The total memory size and number of segments in the 920 and 920E can be changed See the hardware manual and the SET920 program for details After any changes to these settings you must run the MCB Configuration program to register the changes see Section 2 4 179 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first ADC About Presets condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be Real Time useful when you are analyzing samples oo of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before ROI Peak counting For example the Live Time ro Integral preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample Lose contains a large amount of this or Figure 205 920 and 920E Presets Tab another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be count
107. TIONS 32 program This problem does not affect PCI cards To remedy this problem go to the Windows Control Panel then Add Remove Programs select Connections 32 and click on the Add Remove button When the CONNECTIONS 32 wizard starts select Modify unmark the entry for the DPM ISA card then click on Close If a restart is required a message box will tell you to do so For further assistance contact your ORTEC representative or our Global Service Center A 3 MCBLOC32 INI The MCBLOC32 INI file controls the interfaces that are used to communicate with the MCBs attached to your PC The settings in this file are determined by the choices you make in the install wizard and do not affect other MCBs connected via a network Ethernet communication is always enabled so MCBLOC32 INI does not contain entries for MCBs with built in Ethernet adapters such as the DSPEC and ORSIM III For CONNECTIONS 32 applications installed or upgraded beginning in August 2004 you should not change the contents of the MCBLOC32 INI file as was described in earlier revisions of this manual Instead go to the Windows Control Panel then Add Remove Programs select Connections 32 click on the Add Remove button then elect to Modify the software setup This will reopen the Instrument Setup dialog Fig 26 so you can mark or unmark the driver checkboxes as needed close the dialog then run the MCB Configuration program according to the instructions beginning on pag
108. Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve 92 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value This has no function if no ROIs are marked in the MCB The Uncertainty p
109. Vacuum Bias Interlock OCTETE PC OCT TE Plus 184 Windows 2000 network setup 7 Windows 98 network setup 4 Windows NT V4 x network setup 215 Windows XP network setup 11 ZDT MOdE ains obec Bes 51 64 112 204 zero dead time see ZDT mode 204 Zero stabilization ir a es 203 INDEX 221 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 222
110. XM SIN SIGs AS Gee ee ated e caia 199 393 2 A ONUOlS 23 pos wets ey he eee Wht oe Gye Bed es pene wo 199 2 Lhe InSight Display sI AS Cec ee SA eee 199 3 3 4 Shaping Parameter Controls id A ees 201 3 4 Gain Stabilization a eta tant Dink wie Rogue mame erate es ae Maman Seperate 201 De Zer S LAD UI ZAUON ei arn dice A ace dee eae A iaa 203 260 ZDEM de ata Sa RS EA SEES 204 3 7 The MAESTRO Peak Info Calculation Josi id 205 3 8 Setting the Rise Time in Digital MCBS 45 5 425 4565342440600 a dE 208 3 9 The Nuchde Report seiri pent A o 209 3 9 LOMA t aerea AA AAA A eE E OE 210 39 D Calculations ere ax ea ea a EE Wee hk E ay ae ER E 210 392 AGUAS AAA A 211 MAN AA A A ERA AA 212 ee PCA Gast bse ea O O E RR 212 APPENDIX A ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION INFORMATION 213 A 1 Operating CONNECTIONS Software on a Network o o oooooooooocoomocooo o 213 A2 Por 292 Or Pase D Conti pa dee A 214 3 MCBLOC3I2 IN St el id a 214 A 4 Legacy Network Protocol Setup Windows NT v4 x o oo oooccoomcoomoomo o o 215 PLAY Nia A O BE a RU eo 215 A42 TE TOC ON ea ete Bettie A A ts Miah oon ane Co pee ee eae 216 A42 O SERVICES acd tl ene Sa o ia 217 INDEX aria caia E ORD ESA a 219 NOTE We assume that you are thoroughly familiar with 32 bit Microsoft Windows usage and terminology If you are not fully acquainted with the Windows environment including the use of the mouse we strongly urge you to read the Microsoft documentati
111. about twice the FWHM of the peak If the region is too large counts not in the peak will have an effect on the stabilization The ROI can be cleared after the Peak command so that peak count preset can be used on another peak The coarse and fine gains should be set to the desired values both stabilizers initialized and the pole zero triggered before setting either stabilization peak For example on the 92X this is done in the Amplifier tab on the Model 919 it is done externally The Initialize dialog button sets the gain on the stabilization amplifier to its midpoint that is halfway between minimum gain and maximum gain This should be done before selecting the ROI for the peak because the initialization might move the peak in the spectrum and because it ensures that the maximum range is available for the stabilization process If the peak is moved by this command use the amplifier fine gain control the Amplifier tab or hot keys to move the peak to the desired channel When starting a new system the zero initialize command should also be given before starting the gain stabilization The Suggest button is used to set the peak center and peak width of the peak area used by the stabilizer Before selecting this command the ROI must be marked and the marker put in the region to be used When operating the peak will be centered in the ROI After the region has been recorded the stabilization is turned on If the stabilization is turned on
112. access to the InSight Virtual Oscilloscope The Status tab for certain MCBs monitors conditions such as alpha chamber pressure detector status and charge remaining on batteries In addition portable MCBs have a Field Data tab that provides information about the number of spectra currently stored in memory and some support an in field Nuclide Report see Section 3 9 The following MCBs are listed with the newest first Use the table of contents or index to find the setup section for your MCB move from tab to tab and set your hardware parameters then click on Close Note that as you enter characters in the data entry fields the characters will be underlined until you move to another field or until 5 seconds have lapsed since a character was last entered During the time the entry is underlined no other program or PC on the network can modify this value 3 2 MCB Properties Dialogs 3 2 1 trans SPEC 3 2 1 1 Amplifier Figure 35 shows the Amplifier tab This Properties for transSPEC tab displays the controls for the Coarse Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report and Fine Gain Amplifier Ampifier 2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage Gain 1 50 Baseline Restore Dptimize Stop Auto Preamplifier Type Fine 0 7500 Resistor Feedbact v Coarse x2 Figure 35 trans SPEC Amplifier Tab 25 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 1 2 Amplifier 2
113. age is disabled when you change the polarity In NaI mode this selection is disabled 3 2 14 5 Field Data This tab see Fig 151 is used to Enter and Exit the Field Mode remote operation detached from a PC or to view the DART spectra collected in field mode The DART can only be set in Field Mode by clicking on the Enter button on this tab and remains in Field Mode unit you return to this tab and click on Exit It cannot be removed from Field Mode when disconnected from the PC The spectrum can then be viewed in the application as the active spectrum in the DART The active spectrum is the spectrum where the new data are collected The current active spectrum is lost When the DART is in field mode the spectrum is collected in the active spectrum position until the preset is met then it is stored as the next stored spectrum The DART waits until the next trigger and then starts the collection of the new spectrum The trigger is either the trigger signal on the back of the DART or input from the barcode reader connected to the DART NOTE Ifthe DART is in field mode and you attempt to access it within a CONNECTIONS application the following message will be displayed at the bottom of the program window Start or Stop Error Not Allowed During Current Mode Go to the Field Data tab and exit field mode 136 The lower left of the tab shows the total number of spectra not counting the active spectrum stored in the DART memo
114. ains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all co
115. al time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse i e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You 115 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample might be better than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly
116. amplifier gain should be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue to function when the adjustment value reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization x Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets Conversion Gain Lower Level Disc ha Y Upper Level Disc hon H Live Time 31 92 Real Time 32 36 Count Rate Figure 99 microBASE ADC Tab xi Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets d Gain Stabilization Enabled Center Chan Width 56 Suggest Region Adjustment gt Initialize 0 Close Figure 100 microBASE Stabilizer Tab To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into 81 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual the fields If the marker is in an ROL the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the Gain Stabilization Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on The stabilizer will stay enabled even if the power is turned off until changed in this dialog When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed
117. anagement allows you to set the unit for automatic Amplifier ADC Stabiizer HighVoltage FieldData Power About Status Presets Mode Source Start Delay fir y extemal i Battery 1 Voltage 0 03 Off Delay m Battery 2 Voltage 0 53 r Conserve Delay Figure 152 DART Power Tab shutdown when it is not being used The power Mode droplist lets you manually switch the DART between the always On and Conserve modes Use the delay fields to set the time delays from 0 to 65535 seconds before the unit switches to Conserve mode or to complete power off 137 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual In the example shown the DART will go from On mode to Conserve mode 100 seconds after the last command when not in active data acquisition mode It will then power off 600 seconds later if no commands are sent to it Start Delay is used in Field Mode and is the wait time between the barcode reading and the start of the data acquisition 3 2 14 7 About This tab Fig 153 displays hardware and firmware information about the Amplifier ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage FieldData currently selected DART as well as Power About Status Presets the data Acquisition Start Time and R amp D Dart on HAYWOOD_SUSAN Sample description The Access field shows whether the MCB is currently Sample locked with a password Read Write Calibration for P41015a Dart for M1 test indicates that the
118. and return to the PHA display press lt Esc gt or go to the InSight section on the Amplifier 2 tab and click on Stop The PHA mode is set to STOP when you enter the InSight mode 3 3 2 InSight Controls The Status Sidebar changes from the PHA mode controls to the InSight controls for adjusting the peak display On the left is a vertical scrollbar for adjusting the vertical offset of the waveform The value of the offset is shown on the display Double clicking the mouse in the scrollbar will set the vertical offset to the vertical value of the channel at the marker position This lets you conveniently zoom in on a particular part of the waveform such as the tail for pole zeroing In the Auto trigger mode the display is updated every time a new pulse exceeds the trigger level To keep a single pulse displayed select Single Click on Reset to refresh the display to see the next pulse There will usually be one or two pulses in the pipeline that will be displayed before any change entered will be seen If the trigger is turned off the display will be redrawn periodically even if no pulse is there The Delay setting is the time delay between the pulse shown on the display and the trigger level crossing The value of the time delay is shown on the display 3 3 3 The InSight Display Just as for the PHA mode display the vertical scale can be adjusted with the vertical adjustments The display can be set to Log mode but the peak shapes
119. annel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample might be better than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROI the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and t
120. anual Add Nuclides can be added to the list using the library to assist in the region definition or manually To add a nuclide manually enter the nuclide name ROI start and end channels multiplicative factor and units in the Report section Now press Add New to add this nuclide to the list The units need only be entered once since they are the same for all nuclides in the table Library Add To use the library to aid in the definition select the nuclide from the library nuclide drop down list Now select the gamma ray energy from the Energy drop down list This defines what gamma ray to use Now Press the Select from Lib button in the Report section This will update all the entries in this section and show as a yellow band the region to be used in both the expanded spectrum and the full window Now press Add New to add this nuclide to the list Edit To change any of the current nuclides select the nuclide in the list use the scroll bars 1f needed This will show the current settings for this nuclide Make any changes needed Any or all of the entries can be changed When finished with the changes click on Update Delete To remove an entry select the entry and press Delete When you close the Properties dialog all the values entered are written to the trans SPEC and are used when you view the Nuclide Report on the trans SPEC display 33 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 2 Detective EX 3 2 2 1 A
121. arked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 18 5 921E Uncertainty Preset The 921E includes an Uncertainty preset on the Presets tab see Fig 164 page 146 for an example of this preset s data fields The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample might be better than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start C
122. aster list of the instruments found Fig 31 20 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION Configure Instruments Version 5 10 Number amp Description COLE_DOYLE MCB 1 DSPE 399 BAMBAM2 MCB 17 DSPP 140 DSPP POOOE Octete Plus Group 1 Detector 1 Octete Plus Group 1 Detector 2 Octete Plus Group 1 Detector 3 Octete Plus Group 1 Detector 4 Renumber Al 10 Octete Plus Group 2 Detector 1 11 Octete Plus Group 2 Detector 2 Renumber New 12 Octete Plus Group 2 Detector 3 13 Octete Plus Group 2 Detector 4 al Close Cancel Help 7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 I kek Update instrument list on all systems Instr Input System al 1 OCTE 0000 Figure 31 MCB Numbering Note that you can change the instrument numbers and descriptions at any time by double clicking on an instrument entry in the Configure Instruments dialog This will open the Change Description or ID dialog Fig 32 It shows the physical detector location read only and allows you to change the ID and Description Make the desired changes and click on Close Change Description or ID Instrument Input System ID Close g 1 OCTE 0000 E Cancel Figure 32 Change MCB Number or Description If you or another user have already assigned a description to a particular instrument you can restore the default description by deleting the entry in the Description field Then the next time you run MCB Configuration see Section 2 4 the default descri
123. ata in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 26 4 920E Uncertainty Preset The 920E includes an Uncertainty preset on the Presets tab see Fig 164 page 146 for an example of this preset s data fields The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample might be better than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROI the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command which is
124. ayed within 200 V of specified bias voltage since the last time the SOH was cleared Shutdown State of Health This is OK if the detector shutdown has not activated since the last time the SOH was cleared Preamplifier overload State of Health This is OK if the preamplifier overload has not activated since the last time the SOH was cleared Security State of Health This is OK if the security test was passed at the end of the last spectrum acquisition This is available only for SMART 1 detectors 55 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Power State of Health This is OK if the power to the DIM was constant during the last spectrum acquisition 24 volts This is the current value of the 24 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 12 volts This is the current value of the 12 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 12 volts This is the current value of the 12 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 24 volts This is the current value of the 24 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector High Voltage This is the current value of the high voltage bias supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector Detector temperature This is the detector temperature at the time the current spectrum acquisition stopped This is available only for SMART 1 detectors Live detector temperature This is the detector temperature at the current time This is available only for
125. ber pressure is displayed in millitorr mT If the pressure is above the range of the vacuum gauge about 1000 mT the Vacuum is displayed as OVER The cutoff pressure can be set to either 100 mT or 500 mT see the hardware manual for the factory setting and how to change it The vacuum is controlled by the valve on the front of the unit The computer continuously monitors the vacuum whenever this dialog is open 3 2 27 5 Presets Figure 211 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS x ADC HighVoltage About Status Presets Vacuum 2 mT Close Figure 210 OCT TE PC and OCT TE Plus Status Tab I x ADC High Voltage About Status Presets Real Time Live Time 400 00 ROI Peak ROI Integral FF Overflow Close Figure 211 OCT TE Presets Tab know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of
126. bled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay active even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 3 2 10 5 High Voltage Figure 117 shows the High Voltage tab which allows you to turn the high Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report voltage on or off set and monitor the Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage voltage and choose the ShutDown Target 3500 Volts mode Off Actual 3520 Volts Shutdown ORTEC The high voltage is overridden by the detector bias remote shutdown signal from the detector high voltage cannot be enabled if the remote shutdown or On overload signals prevent it Enter the detector high voltage in the Target field click On and monitor the voltage in the Actual field Click the Off Figure 117 digiDART High Voltage Tab button to turn off the high voltage The shutdown can be ORTEC TTL or SMART The ORTEC mode is used for all ORTEC detectors except SMART 1 detectors use the SMART option for those detectors Check with the detector manufacturer for other detectors The TTL mode is used for most non ORTEC detectors The high voltage in the digiDART is supplied by the SMART 1 module or in a separate DIM The recommended HV for SMART 1 is displayed on the dialog For other detectors see the detector manual or data sheet
127. bout the currently selected DSPEC Plus as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the MCB is currently locked with a password Read Write indicates that the MCB is unlocked Read Only means it is locked 3 2 11 6 Presets Figure 130 shows the Presets tab MDA presets are shown on a separate tab The presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data during acquisition the preset field back grounds are gray indicating that they I xi About Presets MDA Preset Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage On Target 2000 olts Off Actual D Volts mo Polarity W s g Close Off Figure 128 DSPEC Plus High Voltage Tab x Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage About Presets MDA Preset DSPP P0006 Sample sample 153 Acquisition Start Time Access 14 33 17 Thursday August 17 2000 Read Write Serial Number Acquisition Mode POOO6 PHA Firmware Revision DSPP 007 Figure 129 DSPEC Plus About Tab are inactive You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped 114 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first Amplifier Ampifier2 ADC Stabilizer
128. can be viewed as a safety valve 100 00 Live Time The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB 197 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 3 Using the InSight Virtual Oscilloscope To assist in setting up ORTEC digital MCBs advanced users can return to the Amplifier 2 tab under Acquire MCB Properties go to the InSight section and click on the Start button to adjust the shaping parameters interactively with a live waveform showing the actual pulse shape or just to verify that the settings are correct The InSight display Fig 227 shows the actual sam
129. ctrum The stored spectra cannot be viewed or stored in the PC until they are moved to the active spectrum position To move a spectrum from the stored memory to the active memory enter the spectrum Properties for transSPEC Field Data About Status Presets MDAPreset Nuclide Report Amplifier Amplifier 2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage On Off Actual Target 2600 Volts 2603 Volts Shutdown SMART Figure 40 trans SPEC High Voltage Tab Properties for transSPEC Amplifier Amplifier 2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuciide Report Move Spectra E 3 Move 4 Stored Spectra Figure 41 trans SPEC Field Data Tab number and click on Move Use the up down arrow buttons to scroll through the list of spectra The label on the lower right does not update until a spectrum is moved The numbers are the same as the numbers shown on the trans SPEC display in the stored spectrum list Note that this 28 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS only moves the spectrum inside the trans SPEC To save the current active spectrum to the PC disk use the File Save commands in the application The Acquire Download Spectra command can also be used to download all the stored spectra and save them to disk automatically They can then be viewed in a buffer window 3 2 1 8 About This tab Fig 42 displays hardware and Properties
130. d in an ROI the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command which is discussed in Section 3 7 Note that the Suggest Region button is not displayed during data acquisition Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 147 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 16 4 MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 165 stops data collection when the minimum detectable activity for a single user specified MDA nuclide reaches the designated value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammaVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA a y b cxCounts Live time Eff x Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The Yield branching ratio is read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield The calculated value is c
131. d nuclide in the library 106 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS If the application supports efficiency calibration and the digiDART is efficiency calibrated the MDA is entered in the units selected in the application If the unit is not efficiency calibrated e g in MAESTRO which does not support efficiency calibration the MDA field is labeled Correction the efficiency Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset operates as before If the Correction factor is the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA preset will function normally 3 2 10 11 Nuclide Report Figure 123 shows the Nuclide Report tab The Nuclide Report displays the Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage activity of up to 9 user selected peaks Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report One te Pe dl Nuclide Lo ROI Hi ROI Factor Add New the Nuclide Report at any time on the Eu 154 643 663 1 0000E 000 digiDART display The peak area _Update_ calculations in the hardware use the gt _ Delete same methods as the MAESTRO Peak Library Report Info calculation see Section 3 7 so Nuelide Eu154 NucidejEu154 rane 1 000 000 the Nuclide Report display is the same E GS Units nergy 1123 v A q as the Peak Info display on the selected a High ROI 663 Select rom Lib peak in the spectra stored in the PC The calculated value is computed by multiplying the net peak count ra
132. d on the DSPEC jr front panel and on the Status Sidebar during data acquisition 84 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Select either the Resistive Feedback or Transistor Reset option and click on Start Auto The optimize command is sent to the DSPEC jr at this time and 1f the DSPEC jr is able to start the operation a series of short beeps sounds to indicate that optimization is in progress When optimizing is complete the beeping stops During optimization pole zeroes are performed for several rise time values and the DSPEC jr is cycled through all the rise time values for the determination of the optimum tilt values As all of the values for all the combinations are maintained in the DSPEC jr the optimize function does not need to be repeated for each possible rise time The optimization can take from 1 to 10 minutes depending on count rate You should repeat the optimization if the flattop width is changed The effect of optimization on the pulse can be seen in the InSight mode on the Amplifier 2 tab Note however that if the settings were close to proper adjustment before starting optimization the pulse shape might not change enough for you to see In this situation you also might not notice a change in the shape of the spectrum peaks The most visible effect of incorrect settings is high or low side peak tailing or poor resolution 3 2 9 2 Amplifier 2 Figure 105 shows the Amplifier 2 tab Properties which accesses the advanced DS
133. disk1 setup exe or the path provided in the software user s manual use your CD ROM drive designator then click on OK This will start the installation wizard Click on Next and follow the wizard prompts 15 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 2 16 If your new software 1s accompanied by a CONNECTIONS 32 Driver Update Kit Part No 797230 skip to Step 5 for now You will be directed later to return to this section to select your instrument drivers If your new software application is not accompanied by a Driver Update Kit the application is already using the most current CONNECTIONS 32 driver In this case you will proceed with instrument setup now go to Step 3 On the Instrument Setup page mark the checkbox es that corresponds to the instrument s physically attached to your PC an example Instrument Setup dialog is shown in Fig 26 To see more information on each instrument family click on the family name and read the corresponding Item Description on the right side of the dialog Instrument Setup E Instrument Families Please check all items in this USB based instruments list that are connected to or O Dual Port Memory plug in cards 154 slot installed in this computer O Dual Port Memory plug in cards PCI slot Click Done when you are O TRUMP PCI cards finished O DART or any other printer port based device O DSP Scint Item Description O microBASE Click on any it
134. do not have a familiar shape in this display The Auto mode will adjust the vertical scale for each pulse The pulse is shown before the amplifier gain has been applied so the relation between channel number and pulse height is not fixed The horizontal scale extends from 16 to 256 channels The display is expanded around the marker position which means that in some cases the peak will disappear from the display when it is expanded 199 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The display can be switched from the MCB to another detector or the buffer In this case the other detector will be shown in the mode selected for it The buffer will always be shown in PHA mode The display will return to the InSight mode when you return to the first MCB If you exit the program with the MCB in InSight mode it will be in InSight mode on the next startup The display can include a Mark to indicate one of the other signals shown in Fig 228 The Mark is a solid color region displayed similarly to that of an ROI in the spectrum This Mark can be used to set the timing for the gate NegBLDisc pulse It can also be used to set the shaping times and flattop parameters to che pi os Isc get the best performance Busy Gate gi lt none gt PileUpReject For example suppose you want to get the best resolution at the highest Peak throughput possible By viewing the pulses and the pileup reject marker you Sei a can incr
135. e Figure 79 shows the High Voltage x tab which allows you to turn the high Amplifier Amplifier2 AmplifierPRO ADC Stabilizer voltage on or off set and monitor the High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset voltage and choose the Shutdown z P 3 i i Target O Volts mode The polarity is set in the DIM i module Off Actual 0 Volts TL al Sodium lodide Detector The high voltage is overridden by the detector bias remote shutdown signal from the detector high voltage cannot be enabled if the remote shutdown or overload signals prevent it Enter the detector high voltage in the Target _ Lose field click On and monitor the Figure 79 DSPEC jr 2 0 High Voltage Tab voltage in the Actual field Click the Off button to turn off the high voltage Overload The shutdown can be ORTEC TTL or SMART The ORTEC mode is used for all ORTEC detectors except SMART 1 detectors Use the SMART option for those detectors Check with the detector manufacturer for other detectors The TTL mode is used for most non ORTEC detectors The high voltage in the DSPEC jr 2 0 is supplied by the SMART 1 module or in a separate DIM The recommended HV for SMART 1 is displayed on the dialog For other detectors see the detector manual or data sheet for the correct voltage The polarity is determined by the DIM or SMART 1 module 65 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual To use a Sodium Iodide
136. e 16 If a restart is required a message box will tell you to do so For further assistance contact your ORTEC representative or our Global Service Center 214 APPENDIX A ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION INFORMATION A 4 Legacy Network Protocol Setup Windows NT v4 x As noted in the introduction to Chapter 2 ORTEC no longer supports Windows NT This section is included for users operating older CONNECTIONS hardware and software To use direct connect MCBs Windows NT V4 x must use the NWLink IPX SPX Compatible Transport protocol As noted above systems without any direct connect Ethernet devices can use any protocol To check to see 1f the NWLink IPX SPX Compatible Transport protocol is installed to add it or to select it as the default click on Start from the Windows Taskbar Next select Settings then Control Panel as shown in Fig 233 lp Programs E i gt a B Documents oft aS Se gt S Control Panel a Printers E i A Taskbar Figure 233 Starting the Control Panel m 4 When the Control Panel opens double click on the Network icon This will open the Network dialog to the Identification tab Network A 4 1 Adapter Network If no adapter is shown it needs to be added Click on the Add button and follow the hardware instructions for adding the proper adapter When adapter setup is complete click on OK to return to the Network dialog Identification Services Protocols Ada
137. e Baseline Restore is used to return the baseline of the pulses to the true zero between incoming pulses This improves the resolution by removing low frequency noise from dc shifts or mains power ac pickup The baseline settings control the time constant of the circuit that returns the baseline to zero There are three fixed choices Auto Fast and Slow The fast setting is used for high count rates the slow for low count rates Auto adjusts the time constant as appropriate for the input count rate The settings Auto Fast or Slow are saved in the DSPEC Pro even when the power is off The time constant can be manually set on the InSight display see Section 3 3 You can view the time when the baseline restorer is active on the InSight display as a Mark region see the discussion on Marks p 200 In the automatic mode the current value is shown on the InSight sidebar Fig 227 For a low count rate system the value will remain at about 90 Preamplifier Type Use the Preamplifier Type section to choose Transistor Reset or Resistive Feedback preamplifier operation Your choice will depend on the preamplifier supplied with the germanium detector being used Patent number 5 912 825 46 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Optimize The DSPEC Pro is equipped with both automatic pole zero logic and automatic flattop logic The Start Auto optimize button uses these features to automatically choose the best pole zero and flattop tilt setting
138. e amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 174 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 2 25 MicroACE 3 2 25 1 Amplifier Figure 198 shows the Amplifier tab This tab contains the fine Gain control Amplifier ADC Stabilizer About Presets Gain 10 84 NOTE The changes you make on this tab take place immediately There is no cancel or undo for this dialog i Fine 10 873 Adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 5 00 to 25 00 3 2 25 2 ADC Close This tab Fig 199 contains the Gate Figure 198 MicroACE Amplifier Tab and Conversion Gain controls In addition the current real time and live time are monitored at the bottom of the dialog
139. e for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve 165 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked w
140. e list of spectra When the correct spectrum number is displayed click on Move The spectrum ID in the lower right will not update until a spectrum is moved Note that this only moves the spectrum inside the Detective memory To save the current active spectrum to the PC disk use the File Save commands in the software application 42 3 2 3 7 About This tab Fig 61 displays hardware and firmware information about the Detective as well as the data Acquisition Start Time Sample description is not used In addition the Access field shows whether the Detector is currently locked with a password Read Write indicates that the Detector is unlocked and Read Only means it is locked 3 2 3 8 Status Figure 62 shows the Status tab Nine parameters are continuously monitored in real time Satisfactory status 1s 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Amplifier Ampifier2 AmpifiePRO ADC Hiah Voltage Field Data About Status Presets SINGLEY_LIZ MCB 130 Sample Acquisition Start Time Access 113 46 33 Monday December 15 2003 Read Write Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode DETA 001 6 PHA Figure 61 Detective About Tab reported as OK or a numerical value A failure is reported as ERR or a descriptive message Use the droplists to select any six parameters to be displayed simultaneously on the Status tab You can change the selected parameters at any time The monitored parameters are e De
141. e marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay enabled even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 27 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 1 6 High Voltage Figure 40 shows the High Voltage tab which allows you to monitor the Actual bias You cannot adjust the bias voltage or turn it on and off these functions are factory set The Shutdown is fixed as SMART for more information on SMART 1 see the ORTEC catalog or visit www ortec online com and cannot be changed 3 2 1 7 Field Data This tab Fig 41 is used to view the trans SPEC spectra collected in Field Mode that is in remote mode detached from a PC The trans SPEC is always in Field Mode when discon nected from the PC The spectrum can then be viewed as the active spectrum in the trans SPEC The active spectrum is the spectrum where the new data are collected The current active spectrum is lost The lower left of the tab shows the total number of spectra not counting the active spectrum stored in the trans SPEC memory The spectrum ID of the active spectrum is shown in the lower right The spectrum ID is the eight character alphanumeric value stored with the spe
142. e most visible effect of incorrect settings is high or low side peak tailing or poor resolution 3 2 5 2 Amplifier 2 Figure 75 shows the Amplifier 2 tab Fa which ACCESSES the advanced DSPEC JE High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset 2 0 shaping controls including the Amplifier Amplifier2 AmpliierPRO ADC Stabilizer InSight Virtual Oscilloscope mode see m Rise Time Flattop Section 3 3 ho wiah oso The many choices of Rise Time allow H you to precisely control the tradeoff Pole Zero between resolution and throughput The value of the rise time parameter in the DSPEC jr 2 0 is roughly equivalent to twice the integration time set on a conventional analog spectroscopy amplifier Thus a DSPEC jr 2 0 value Figure 75 DSPEC jr 2 0 Amplifier 2 Tab m InSight Star Stop f 3009 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual of 12 corresponds to 6 in a conventional amplifier Starting with the nominal value of 12 0 you should increase values of the rise time for better resolution for expected lower count rates or when unusually high count rates are anticipated reduce the rise time for higher throughput with somewhat worse resolution Use the up down arrows to adjust the Rise Time within the range of 0 8 to 23 0 us After all the controls have been adjusted return to the Amplifier tab and click on Start Auto The most recent settings are saved in the DSPEC jr
143. e of health status ooo ooo 66 zero dead time ZDT mode 64 DSPEC PIUS iaa ceda eee aes os 108 zero dead time ZDT 112 DSPEC PIO sad ic weed ee te 45 Amplifier PRO tab 49 Enhanced Throughput Mode 49 Low Frequency Rejector LFR 49 Resolution Enhancer o o 50 state of health status 54 zero dead time ZDT mode 51 Enhanced Throughput Mode 49 Field Data DART oratorio eas 136 Detective ts ds 41 Detective EX sia sais 36 IADART cada 100 microONOMAD o oocooococomoom 172 tats PEC os aras 28 Gain stabilization lt td oe x 201 InSight mode AUTO MOE ds nes 199 UPA as AAA 199 NAUOPs 2 200 201 horizontal scale 2000 cres 199 l g Mode roster 199 Maik dae ad wa ace eae ae 200 Marly pes soci e 200 ODUNMZE ck cave owe eG oak ee eee we a 201 pileup reject marker 200 resolution ens 200 201 A RAS ee eek sae et 200 201 SHADING s soei iaa wee wig daw E 200 shaping parameter controls 201 throughput e Es 200 vertical scale 40 oe y eas wage eae ees 199 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Installation application software 15 configure Windows 2000 7 configure Windows 98 o oo oo o 4 configure Windows NT 215 configure Windows XP
144. e the SOH was cleared Shutdown State of Health This is OK if the detector shutdown has not activated since the last time the SOH was cleared Preamplifier overload State of Health This is OK if the preamplifier overload has not activated since the last time the SOH was cleared Security State of Health This is OK if the security test was passed at the end of the last spectrum acquisition This is available only for SMART 1 detectors Power State of Health This is OK if the power to the DIM was constant during the last spectrum acquisition 24 volts This is the current value of the 24 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 12 volts This is the current value of the 12 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 12 volts This is the current value of the 12 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 24 volts This is the current value of the 24 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector High Voltage This is the current value of the high voltage bias supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector Detector temperature This is the detector temperature at the time the current spectrum acquisition stopped This is available only for SMART 1 detectors 91 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Live detector temperature This is the detector temperature at the current time This is available only for SMART 1 detectors Battery voltage This is not used in t
145. e values for the MDA type selected The MDA type should be chosen before the preset is selected here Select the Nuclide and Energy from the droplists The Nuclide list contains all the nuclides in the working library The Energy list shows all the gamma ray energies for the selected nuclide in the library If the application supports efficiency x calibration and the MCB is efficiency Amplifier Amplfier2 AmplfierPRO ADC Stabilizer calibrated the MDA is entered in the High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset units selected in the application If the DAP NE unit is not efficiency calibrated e g in MAESTRO which does not support efficiency calibration the MDA field Eog is labeled Correction the efficiency pall all Correction aaa ca A 0 000000 Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset Nuclide 4g 110M y B o 000000 Suggest operates as before If the Correction ae stom factor is the actual MDA times the nera E fe efficiency known from other sources Close the MDA preset will function normally Figure 73 DSPEC Pro MDA Preset Tab 3 2 5 DSPEC jr 2 0 3 2 5 1 Amplifier Figure 74 shows the Amplifier tab This tab contains the controls for Gain Baseline Restore Preamplifier Type Input Polarity and Optimize NOTE Be sure that all of the controls on the tabs have been set before clicking the Start Auto optimize button The changes you make on most property tabs
146. ease or decrease the rise time to obtain a minimum of pileup reject e ay pulses Mark Types For the Mark choose either points or filled to the zero line display This is controlled by the selection in the Display Preferences menu item That choice does not affect the PHA mode choice The colors are the same as for the PHA mode Not all DSP MCBs support all Marks None PileUpReject NegBLDisc BaseLineR PosBLDisc Busy 200 No channels are marked in the display The region marked indicates when the PUR circuit has detected pileup and is rejecting the marked pulses This shows when the negative baseline discriminator has been triggered Typically this signal only marks the TRP reset pulse The signal is used internally in the live time correction baseline restoration and pile up rejection circuits This shows when the baseline restorer is actively restoring the baseline This shows when the positive baseline discriminator has been triggered The signal is used internally in the live time correction baseline restoration and pile up rejection circuits When the MCB busy signal is active Busy shows in the Mark box It represents the dead time 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS o Gate This shows when the gate signal is present on the gate input connector If the Gate mode on the ADC tab see Fig 115 is set to Off then all regions are marked If the mode is set to Coincidence then the marked region mu
147. east activity But 1f the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Amplifier ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage FieldData Power About E Status Presets Thermistor 51 00 Ohms Figure 154 DART Status Tab for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a Safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse i e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any Amplifier ADC Stbiizer HighV
148. ed you must set the pole zero To do this go to the Pole Zero section of the dialog and click on Start Auto If the 92X II is able to start the pole zero a series of short beeps will sound indicating that the pole zero is in progress When the pole zeroing is finished the beeps will stop 126 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS As with any system the amplifier should be pole zeroed any time the detector is changed or the shaping time of the amplifier is changed Pole zeroing requires the amplifier to be amplifying pulses The detector should be connected in the final configuration before pole zeroing is started There should be a radioactive source near the detector so that the count rate will be high enough about 5 to 10 dead time to accomplish the pole zero in the proper time Without an oscilloscope connected to the amplifier output to display the pulse shape the effect of the pole zero operation is not always easy to see The most common effect of an incorrect pole zero setting is tailing on the peak shape in the spectrum Here tailing refers to abnormally high counts on either side of the peak If the amplifier was close to the proper pole zero setting before the operation the spectrum peak shape might not change enough to be seen 3 2 13 2 ADC This tab Fig 141 contains the Gate and Conversion Gain controls In addition the current real time and live time are monitored at the bottom of the dialog Gate The Gate control allows you
149. ed 4 Zero Stabilization Enabled applied The Initialize buttons set the Center Chan 25 Center Chan 25 adjustment to 0 If the value approaches Width 50 Width 51 90 or above the amplifier gain should j ili Suggest Region Suggest Region be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue ARA gg g Adjustment Adjustment gt to function when the adjustment value e reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make tetas te J Iniialze 0 further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show Close the peak currently used for stabilization Figure 142 92X II Stabilizer Tab To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROI the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay active even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed High Voltage Figure 143 shows the High Voltage xi tab The On and Off buttons apply and Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets MDA Prese
150. ed during data acquisition Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 19 4 MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 179 stops data collection when the minimum detectable activity for a single user specified MDA nuclide reaches the designated value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammaVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA at b c Counts Live time Eff x Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The Yield branching ratio is read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield The calculated value is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition 1s stopped Coefficients A B and C can be entered as numbers If the application ADC About Presets MDA Preset such as GammaVision supports MDA calculations you can click on the Suggest button to enter from an internal table the values for the MDA MDA Preset type selected The MD
151. ed to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve Overflow The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB 180 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when d
152. ee Mae ee RET Sh OMEN 162 DX eae win Bedi wah sey Sas ORME 140 A ten kan cee een hee Ses 126 ACE 18a sang p a a a wn ati keane Se 166 Chamber pressure OCTETE 185 Configuration initial MCB configuration 20 master instrument list 20 23 Windows 2000 network protocol 7 Windows 98 network protocol 4 Windows NT network protocol 215 Windows XP network protocol 11 DAK Diao dae 132 Field Mode start delay 138 power status sosa ss 137 thermistor arre 138 Zero AUS cano res 135 DGIGCUVG A reas eile an ok eve ees 39 Amplifier PRO tab 40 NGld Gala rr due han Po 41 Low Frequency Rejector LFR 40 state of health status oo o o 43 D tective EX is choices tle ges eA eee ee 34 Amplifier PRO tab 35 Low Frequency Rejector LFR 35 state of health status oo o o 37 digiBASE ekeni gate ia 71 CGIAR T aaa Ps 95 UCI data sara 100 state of health status o 102 Digital offset 920 WE epa ade 178 OCT TE PC OCT TE Plus 183 DSP SCit isa dears Wea oa A 76 pole zero adjustment 76 DSPEC cia narra cee eta ee eRe de 117 DSPEC J find Ped tax ded vasa ass 83 state of health status 89 DSPEC 20s dois aca 59 Amplifier PRO tab o 63 Low Frequency Rejector LFR 63 stat
153. em in the list O 585 60 or SBS 65 to get more information O Miniature MCA miniWC4 166 O Maca O digiDART R5232 O DSPEC jr RS232 ooo Local Instrument list 1 GRAY_GC MCB 134 SN 177 IV Allow other computers to use this computer s instruments Figure 26 Choose the Interface for Your Instruments If you already have an ORTEC CONNECTIONS 32 application installed on this PC you probably already have ORTEC CONNECTIONS 32 instruments attached to it If so they will 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION be included on the Local Instrument List at the bottom of the dialog along with any new instruments Existing instruments those previously configured before this installation do not have to be powered on during this part of the installation procedure If you want other computers in a network to be able to use your MCBs leave the Allow other computers to use this computer s instruments marked so the MCB Server program will be installed Most users will leave this box marked for maximum flexibility NOTE If your PC uses Windows XP and you wish to use or share ORTEC MCBs across a network be sure to read Section 2 2 3 Click on Done If your PC is operating under Windows 2000 or XP the installation wizard will resume copying files If your PC uses Windows 98 SE there Insert Disk are two additional dialogs that might be displayed The first shown in Fig 27 might ask yo
154. en the Instrument Setup dialog Fig 26 so you can mark or unmark the driver checkboxes as needed Close the dialog then re run the MCB Configuration program according to the instructions beginning on page 16 2 5 Detector Security If your application supports detector locking and unlocking you can assign a password to protect Detectors from destructive access Once a password is set no application can start stop clear change presets change ROIs or perform any command that affects the data in the detector if the password is not known however in most cases the current spectrum and settings for the locked device can be viewed read only The password is required for any access even on a network This includes changing instrument descriptions and IDs with the MCB Configuration program 23 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 24 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 1 Introduction ORTEC CONNECTIONS 32 applications now use a uniform data acquisition setup dialog called Properties The Properties dialog opens when you select the appropriate command in the application This chapter covers the Properties dialog for all CONNECTIONS compliant MCBs Depending on the currently selected MCB the Properties dialog displays several tabs of hardware controls including ADC setup parameters acquisition presets high voltage controls amplifier gain adjustments gain and zero stabilizers pole zero and other shaping controls and
155. en though at least one detector already has a number If you want your detector numbers to remain unchanged for your existing detectors you should press Cancel then choose Renumber New Press OK to continue renumbering or Cancel to abandon this operation Cancel Figure 34 Renumbering Warning Click on the Help button on the Configure Instruments dialog to display a detailed help screen When you have completed all changes to the instrument list click on Close to close the Configure Instruments dialog At this point MAESTRO and other CONNECTIONS applications can be run on any PC and the MCB pick list for each program on each PC can be tailored to a specific list of instruments 22 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION 2 4 Re Running the MCB Configuration Program to Update the Master Instrument List When an MCB is added to the system or if you change total memory size and number of segments for a multi input MCB such as the Model 920 or a member of the OCT TE instrument family you can t communicate with the new input s until you have 1 enabled its CONNECTIONS 32 driver if the appropriate driver is not already active and 2 re run the MCB Configuration program to add the new device to the Master Instrument List To do this Open the Windows Add Remove Programs utility on the Control Panel Select Connections 32 from the program list choose Add Remove then elect to Modify the software setup This will reop
156. ents a b and c are x determined Dy tie MUA formia tohe Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets MDA Preset oe Hil I Ly used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The MDA Preset Nuclide _Add New Yield branching ratio is read from the Update working library using the nuclide and Delete energy specified The MDA value is MDA Preset Coefficients the one you have entered in the dialog Conection A a o o50000 Counts is the gross counts in the Nuclide g 110M y B 27 000000 Suggest specified region and Live time is the Energy 445 80 y keV C fo 000020 live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield The calculated value is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition is stopped Figure 146 92X II MDA Preset Tab Coefficients A B and C can be entered as numbers If the application such as GammaVision supports MDA calculations you can click on the Suggest button to enter from an internal table the values for the MDA type selected The MDA type should be chosen before the preset is selected here Select the Nuclide and Energy from the droplists The Nuclide list contains all the nuclides in the working library The Energy list shows all the gamma ray energies for the selected nuclide in the library If the application supports efficiency ca
157. eometry If NucCoef is set to 1 you will get peak count rate on the display LiveTime is the current live time NetCounts is computed with the following equation NetCounts GrossCounts Background GrossCounts is the sum of the counts in the ROI excluding the first and last 3 channels of the ROI Background is Backer AvgCount first 3 chan AvgCount last 3 chan ROIWidth ROIWidth is ROIWidth EndChannel StartChannel 1 6 211 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 9 2 2 Uncertainty Uncertainty in percent is calculated as follows GrossCounts Background Uncertainty lt Wiggs 100 etCounts 3 9 2 3 Peak Peak is the position of the maximum count and is computed with the following equation Peak MaximumROIChan EnergySlope Energylntercept where MaximumROIChan is the channel in the ROI with the most counts If there are no data the center channel of the ROI is used EnergySlope and Energylntercept are the energy calibration values as entered on the MCB keypad or by software If the values are not present the result is given in channels 212 APPENDIX A ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION INFORMATION A 1 Operating CONNECTIONS Software on a Network MAESTRO and other CONNECTIONS software operates the same for local MCBs those connected directly to the PC running MAESTRO and for remote MCBs connected by Ethernet those connected to PCs other than the local PC run
158. eral activity before ROlPeak wan counting For example the Live Time i preset can be set so that sufficient ee ula counts can be obtained for proper Overflow calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample Close contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be Figure 164 MatchMaker Presets Tab 146 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset
159. erial Number Acquisition Mode mBAS 025 02L0119 PHA Close Figure 102 microBASE About Tab Enter either the Real Time or Live Time preset in units of seconds and fractions of a second This value is stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the Detector clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the Detector is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the Detector is not available To disable a preset enter a value of 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets l Real Time 100 00 Live Time Close Figure 103 microBASE Presets Tab zero If both presets are disabled data acquisition will continue until manually stopped The values of all presets for the currently selected Detector are shown on the application s Status Sidebar 3 2 9 DSPEC jr 3 2 9 1 Amplifier Figure 104 shows the Amplifier tab This tab contains the controls for Gain Baseline Restore Preamplifier Type Input Polarity and Optimize Be sure that all of the controls on the tabs have been set before clicking the Start Auto optimize button NOTE The changes you make on most property tabs take place immediately There is no cancel or undo for these dialogs Gain Set the amplifier coarse gain b
160. ermined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The Yield branching ratio is read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield The calculated value is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition is stopped Coefficients A B and C can be entered as numbers If the application amplies Ampiterz ADC Stabiizer High votage such as Ga aVision supports Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report MDA calculations you can click on ea PEE a eee ET the Suggest button to enter froman fE 120 0000 c ztos 98 03 see 150 0000 co ei liiy Update internal table the values for the MDA type selected The MDA type should Dete be chosen before the preset is selected ee Cuol vierte here Anrrertina 150 0000 n ay h 000000 Nucide Co 60 B fi 000000 SUacEst Select the Nuclide and Energy from Energy 1173 24 y kev C 1 700001 the droplists The Nuclide list contains all the nuclides in the working library Llose The Energy list shows all the gamma Figure 122 digiDART MDA Preset Tab ray energies for the selecte
161. eset will function normally 3 2 6 digiBASE 3 2 6 1 Amplifier Figure 84 shows the Amplifier tab This tab contains the controls for Gain and Shaping Time Set the amplifier coarse gain by setting the gain jumper described in the hardware manual to 1 3 or 9 then adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 4 to 1 2 The resulting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section The two controls used together cover the entire range of amplification from 0 4 to 10 8 Properties for SINGLEY_LIZ MCB 129 x About Status Presets Amplifier Ampifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage Gain 050 r Shaping Time w ors I Fine 0 5000 Figure 84 digiBASE Amplifier Tab 71 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual In almost all cases the default Shaping Time 0 75 us is the preferred setting However the digiBASE supports shaping times from 0 75 us to 2 us in steps of 0 25 ps 3 2 6 2 Amplifier 2 Figure 85 shows the Amplifier 2 tab which accesses the InSight Virtual AET E Oscilloscope mode see Section 3 3 Amplifier Amplifier 2 ADC Stabiizer HighVoltage For the more advanced user the InSight mode allows you to directly the digiB ASE s advanced shaping para meters and adjust them interactively while collecting live data To access the InSight mode click on Start InSight
162. fier2 AmpliierPRO ADC Stabilizer currently selected DSPEC Pro as well High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset as the data Acquisition Start Time RANDT266 MCB 132 and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the a ample Detector is currently locked with a password Read Write indicates that T Acquisition Start Time Access the Detector is unlocked Read Only 15 09 06 Monday September 22 2003 Read wiite means it is locked Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Made DSPA 001 00123 PHA Figure 70 DSPEC Pro About Tab 3 2 4 7 Status Figure 71 shows the Status tab There Properties for RANDT266 MCB 132 E xi are 21 values monitored at all times Amplifier Amplifier2 AmplifierPRO ADC Stabilizer You can select any six of these to be High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset displayed simultaneously on the Status Detector State Of Healthy tab The parameters you choose can be changed at any time so you can view y DIM 24V State Of Heath ERR them as needed Two types of values y DIM 12V State Of Health ERR are presented OK or ERR and S DIM 12 State Of Health ERR numeric value The state of health a DIM 24 State Di Heath BN SOH parameters are all OK or v for Temperature State Of Health ERR ERR If the state is OK the parameter stayed within the set limits during the spectrum acquisition If the parameter
163. for transSPEC firmware information about the trans A Pare aa A zer age SPEC as well as the data Acquisition Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nucide Report Start Time Sample description is not transSPEC used In addition the Access field shows whether the Detector is currently locked with a password Read Write Sample indicates that the Detector is unlocked and Read Only means it is locked Acquisition Start Time Access 12 00 00 Thursday June 17 2004 Read Write Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode TSPE 100 229 PHA Figure 42 trans SPEC About Tab 3 2 1 9 Status Figure 43 shows the Status tab Nine Properties for transSPEC parameters are continuously monitored in real time Amplifier Amplifier 2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report Satisfactory status is reported as OK or State Of Health OK a numerical value A failure is reported y Detector Temperature OK as ERR or a descriptive message Use e Battery Voltage 16 41 Volts the droplists to select any six parameters E Battoy Tine Remaining 70M to be displayed simultaneously on the Cooler Body T ture OK Status tab You can change the selected M onor pony Emperaure parameters at any time y DK Figure 43 trans SPEC Status Tab 29 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The monitored parameters are
164. for Gain Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets MDA Preset Shaping Time Preamplifier Type o Gain 5 00 r Shaping Time Pole Zero and Pole Zero Be sure that all of the 0 30 os E Start Auto controls on the tabs have been set EST A eta before clicking the Start Auto pole p Preamplifier Type zero button Resistor Feedback NOTE The changes you make on this tab take place immediately Needs Auto PZ There is no cancel or undo for this dialog Close Figure 140 92X II Amplifier Tab Gain Set the amplifier coarse gain by selecting from the Coarse droplist then adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 3 to 1 0 The resulting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section The two controls used together cover the entire range of amplification from 3 0 to 1000 0 Shaping Time Use the Shaping Time droplist to select the 92X II amplifier pulse shaping time constant The displayed values are the values available for this 92X II The selections are 2 us and 6 us Preamplifier Type and Pole Zero The Preamplifier Type section lets you choose Transistor Reset or Resistive Feedback preamplifier operation The 92X II amplifier is equipped with an automatic pole zero circuit If Transistor Reset Preamplifier is selected for this 92X II the pole zero is not needed When the Resistive Feedback option is select
165. for the correct voltage The polarity is determined by the DIM or SMART 1 module 3 2 10 6 Field Data This tab Fig 118 is used to view the digiDART spectra collected in Field Mode that is in remote mode detached from a PC The digiDART is always in Field Mode when disconnected 100 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS from the PC The spectrum can then be Properties Lx O viewed as the active spectrum in the Amplifier Ampifier2 ADC Stabilzer HighVoltage digiDART The active spectrum is the spectrum Field Dats About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report where the new data are collected The a current active spectrum is lost hy Move The lower left of the tab shows the total number of spectra not counting the active spectrum stored in the digiDART memory The spectrum ID of the active spectrum is shown in the lower right The spectrum ID is the eight character Close alphanumeric value stored with the spectrum The stored spectra cannot be viewed or stored in the PC until they are moved to the active spectrum position 9 Stored Spectra 123657 Figure 118 The digiDART Field Mode Spectrum Tab To move a spectrum from the stored memory to the active memory enter the spectrum number and click on Move Use the up down arrow buttons to scroll through the list of spectra The label on the lower right does not update until a spectrum is moved The numbers are the same as the numbers shown o
166. g For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve Figure 44 trans SPEC Presets Tab 30 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS The values of all presets for the currently selected Detector are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the Detector clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the Detector is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the Detector is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the Detector stops coun
167. g on user selected dose units and indicating whether this reading was made with the detector Ge for low dose rates or the Geiger M ller tube cm for high dose rates see the hardware manual for discussion of the two dose rate meters e Detector Temperature reported as OK or ERR e Battery Voltage reported in volts e Battery Time Remaining in minutes e Cooler Body Temperature OK or ERR e Cooler Drive Voltage OK or ERR e Cold Tip Temperature ox or ERR e HV Bias in volts To resolve status problems refer to the troubleshooting list in the hardware manual 37 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 2 9 Presets Figure 54 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set when the Amplifier Amplifier 2 Amplifier PRO ADC Detective EX is not acquiring data High Voltage FieldData About Status Presets during acquisition the preset field backgrounds are gray indicating that Real Time they are inactive You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero ROI Peak If you disable all of the presets data E ROI Integral acquisition will continue until manually stopped J Overflow 1000 Live Time NOTE The presets on this tab do not affect the Detective EX when Figure 54 Detective EX Presets Tab the instrument is operating in standalone configuration disconnected from the PC When operating as a
168. ggest Region Suggest Region value approaches 90 or above the AU aa o amplifier gain should be adjusted so Initialize 0 Initialize 0 the stabilizer can continue to function when the adjustment value reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make _ amp s further corrections in that direction Figure 68 DSPEC Pro Stabilizer Tab The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROI the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in 52 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay enabled even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 3 2 4 5 High Voltage Figure 69 shows the High Voltage tab which allows you to turn the high voltage on or off set and monitor the voltage and choose the Shutdown mode The polarity is set in the DIM module The high voltage is overridden by the detector bias remote shutdown signal from the detector high voltage cannot be enabled if the remote
169. gion reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROI the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command which is discussed in Section 3 7 Note that the Suggest Region button is not displayed during data acquisition Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 15 92X NOMAD and NOMAD Plus 3 2 15 1 Amplifier Figure 156 shows the Amplifier tab This tab contains the controls for Gain Shaping Time Preamplifier Type and Pole Zero The Start Auto pole zero buttons should only be clicked after all of the controls on the tabs have been set NOTE The changes you make on this tab take place immediately There is no cancel or undo for this dialog 140 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Gain Set the amplifier coarse gain by selecting xl from the Coarse droplist then adjust the Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 4 to 1 0000 aan a The resulting effective gain is shown at Shor Y Preamplifier Type Fine
170. h fT or all of the presets at one time To Pot integral disable a preset enter a value of zero Suggest Region TF Overflow If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped Figure 121 digiDART Presets Tab When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that 104 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fraction
171. ha BSE oh ore koa ees 66 92 9 0 SLATS srta dra stereo ena 66 32X9 O en pee agi de ao E A 68 52541 MDA Pres t ape errado 70 TABLE OF CONTENTS 22 0 IDI ADE E eine eee ee eens 71 3 20 E A betes deeds eciedecses 71 EA AMPIE A aED a E EREE EE E E E E A 72 A ADG aiee snan a a ote ne eae ee ate as 72 3 2 6 4 Stabilizer a taa iaa da 173 3 20 35 Hish Voltage derrita po PENERE A A E 74 3 20 60 FOUL sire vacune Sasneeeeeeeadies EAEE EE a EE EE S 74 A Ea E ce E 75 DO PICSE diarrea 75 3 2 1 IIS POS CIO sicca eneee co ei eii neea a E e E E e E EA 76 EN AMPIE g prere presne pek ee ketene ee aR e N EE E a 76 AA a a a E AE 71 3 2 7 3 Stabilizer ra a 78 3 2 7 4 e 79 32 E eee eene E a a E E dtc E E 79 3 2 0 ig ol oh speakerre nderi a ee ee ee ee ee ee T 80 3 2 97 MMIC OMA ais co trade tnne ere mee ds 80 3 2 9 AMP 4 otesceee seeped ee bee de ned ecto bee eetee beeen kes 80 A ne ee phase E e tes Vee ee tee eer oe sear near 81 3 2 8 3 Stabilizer dosing cast AE ae ba 81 3 2 8 4 High Voltage cerrar iia 82 A A E E T E AE Ore wceas 82 3 2 8 0 Presets asocio cote Hone esur SEERE ETRE mE pE EEEE EEEE 82 329 DSPEC ji sabe eet A E AAA 83 52 A Ampl ies pdas 83 5292 2 o A enpe eee EEE sey kere e bee een ea seo keh ee 85 2200 ADC orage nimii oii bebe PE E cassie kd tawenseeeeesie set 87 3 2 9 4 Stabilizer third yi weed age aa oud oe ee Ph a a ea ee 88 3 2 9 5 High Voltage ices autacu anes quae a ea aa oe eS 88 D2 O aioe Seeded dene
172. han and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROI the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command which is discussed in Section 3 7 Note that the Suggest Region button is not displayed during data acquisition 156 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 2 18 6 921E MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 175 stops data collection when the minimum detectable activity for a single user specified MDA nuclide reaches the designated value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammaVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA a y b c Counts Live time Eff x Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The Yield branching ratio is read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield The calculated val
173. hannel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 24 MicroNOMAD 3 2 24 1 Amplifier Figure 192 shows the Amplifier tab which contains the Gain control Amplifier ADC Stabilizer Field Data About Presets Gain 15 00 NOTE The changes you make on this 5 as 25 00 tab take place immediately PETRER There is no cancel or undo i EEN for this dialog _ HE Gain Set the amplifier Gain with the hori zontal slider bar or the edit box in the Close range of 5 00 to 25 00 The resulting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section Figure 192 MicroNOMAD Amplifier Tab 170 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 2 24 2 ADC This tab Fig 193 contains the Gate and Conversion Gain controls In Amplifier ADC Stabilizer Field Data About Presets addition the current real time and live R Gate Conversion Gain time are monitored at the bottom of the e yl dialog Gate The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating func
174. he DSPEC jr Battery full This is not used in the DSPEC jr Battery time remaining This is not used in the DSPEC jr 3 2 9 8 Presets Figure 111 shows the Presets tab Properties MDA presets are shown on a separate tab Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage i About Status Presets MDA Preset The presets can only be set on an i Aelia las MCB that is not acquiring data o Preset in during acquisition the preset field aes ates backgrounds are gray indicating that l BLON Ale pray g ROI Peak wide they are inactive You can use any or all of the presets at one time To ROI Integral Suggest Region disable a preset enter a value of zero M Overflow If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped Figure 111 DSPEC jr Presets Tab When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live
175. he amplifier output to display the pulse shape the effect of the pole zero operation is not always easy to see The most common effect of an incorrect pole zero setting is tailing on the peak shape in the spectrum Here tailing refers to abnormally high counts on either side of the peak If the amplifier was close to the proper pole zero setting before the operation the spectrum peak shape might not change enough to be seen Pileup Rejection Pileup Rejection PUR is used to reject overlapping pulses improving the peak shape This checkbox allows you to disable the PUR This feature is normally enabled and is only turned off for special detectors 193 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 29 2 Amplifier 2 The Amplifier 2 tab Fig 220 contains xl the Signal Routing and Analog Power E AS Threshold controls Amplifier Amplifier 2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage nalog Threshold The Signal Routing droplist allows you E to route the detector input signal directly to the ADC as positive Direct 0 to 3V negative Direct 0 to 3V or Through Amplifier Direct 0 to 34 Signal Routing The Analog Threshold can be 2 60 of full scale Pulses below the threshold do not contribute to ADC dead time bese Figure 220 MiniMCA 166 Amplifier 2 Tab 3 2 29 3 ADC This tab Fig 221 contains the Con version Gain Lower Level Discrimi xi nator and Upper
176. he constant includes the efficiency and branching ratio the displayed value is the activity You enter the nuclide label and the activity units 209 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Properties x Amplifier Amplfier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report eaa 3 CATA at Pe pe Nuclide Lo ROI Hi ROI Factor Add New Eu 154 643 663 1 0000E 000 Update gt Delete Library Report Nuclide Eu 154 Nuclide JEu 154 Factor 1 0000 000 Low ROI 1643 Units a Energy 12314 Higa no fee3 Select fom Lb Marker 653 123 23 keV 1 762 Cnts Figure 231 Typical Nuclide Report Setup Tab 3 9 1 Format The report has this format CO 60 1332 5 1 21E 01 10 2 a eT e a aa 3 9 2 Calculations These are the calculations used to generate the Activity Uncertainty and Peak values for the Nuclide Report 210 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 9 2 1 Activity Activity is calculated as follows Ahi os NucCoef LiveTime where NucCoef is normally the inverse of the product of the efficiency and the branching ratio Note that the efficiency is the absolute counting efficiency for the source detector geometry being used Thus in order to get meaningful activity results as in any counting situation you need to have efficiency factors which are appropriate to the actual counting g
177. he count rate will be high enough about 5 to 10 dead time to accomplish the pole zero in the proper time If the detector does not pole zero in a few minutes there might be some problem with the detector or cables Click on Stop Auto to halt the pole zeroing operation By entering a value in the Pole Zero field you can set the pole zero value to any value you wish much the same as with the old fashioned screwdriver potentiometer but with much greater reproducibility The setting has no units This gives you the ability to exactly set the pole zero for any detector to the value used previously ensuring data quality and reproducibility Without an oscilloscope connected to the amplifier output to display the pulse shape the effect of the pole zero operation is not always easy to see The most common effect of an incorrect pole zero setting is tailing on the peak shape in the spectrum Here tailing refers to abnormally high counts on either side of the peak If the amplifier was close to the proper pole zero setting before the operation the spectrum peak shape might not change enough to be seen Input Polarity The Input Polarity radio buttons select the preamplifier input signal polarity for the signal from the detector Normally GEM p type detectors have a positive signal and GMX n type have a negative signal Pileup Rejection Pileup Rejection PUR is used to reject overlapping pulses improving the peak shape This checkbox allows
178. he efficiency Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset operates as before If the Correction factor is the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA preset will function normally 3 2 1 12 Nuclide Report Figure 46 shows the Nuclide Report tab The Nuclide Report displays the activity of up to 9 user selected peaks Once the report is set up you can view the Nuclide Report at any time on the trans SPEC display The peak area calculations in the hardware use the same methods as the MAESTRO Peak Info calculation see Section 3 7 so the Nuclide Report display is the same as the Peak Info display on the selected peak in the spectra stored in the PC The calculated value is computed by multiplying the net peak count rate by a user defined constant If the constant 32 Properties for transSPEC Amplifier Amplifier 2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report Add New Update Delete Report Nuclide Factor Low Rol Units UCI M2 Low High Factor Library Nuclide 49 110M v Energy 446 80 E High ROI Select from Lib Figure 46 trans SPEC Nuclide Report Tab 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS includes the efficiency and branching ratio the displayed value is the activity You enter the nuclide label and the activity units The report format and calculations are discussed in detail in Section 3 9 Add New M
179. he width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command which is discussed in Section 3 7 Note that the Suggest Region button is not displayed during data acquisition Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 124 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 2 12 8 MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 139 stops data collection when the minimum detectable activity for a single user specified MDA nuclide reaches the designated value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammaVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA a y b cxCounts Live time Eff x Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The Yield branching ratio is read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield The calculated value is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition is stopped C
180. hen it is lower acquisition is stopped Coefficients A B and C can be Properties AA xi entered as numbers If the application ADC High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset such as GammaVision supports MDA calculations you can e a the HDA Preset Nuclide _AddNew_ Suggest button to enter from an internal table the values for the MDA Delete type selected The MDA type should be MDA Preset Coefficients chosen before the preset is selected Correction cA a 2 710000 here Nuclide Ag110M y B 0 000000 Suggest Energy 446 80 y keV Es 21 700001 Select the Nuclide and Energy from the droplists The Nuclide list contains all the nuclides in the working library Figure 212 OCT TE Plus MDA Preset Tab The Energy list shows all the gamma ray energies for the selected nuclide in the library If the application supports efficiency calibration and the OCT TE Plus is efficiency calibrated the MDA is entered in the units selected in the application If the unit is not efficiency calibrated 187 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual e g in MAESTRO which does not support efficiency calibration the MDA field is labeled Correction the efficiency Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset operates as before If the Correction factor is the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA preset will function normally 3 2 28 M CA 3 2 28 1
181. hrough the valid settings for the M CA Figure 214 M CA ADC Tab Upper and Lower Level Discriminators In the M CA the lower and upper level discriminators are under computer control The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions Setting that level above random noise increases useful throughput because the MCB is not unproductively occupied processing noise pulses 189 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions 3 2 28 3 High Voltage Figure 215 shows the High Voltage tab which allows you to turn the high voltage on or off set and monitor the voltage and select the Polarity Enter the detector high voltage in the Target field click On and monitor the voltage in the Actual field Click the Off button to turn off the high voltage The high voltage is overridden by the detector bias remote shutdown signal from the detector high voltage cannot be enabled if the remote shutdown or overload signals prevent it xi Amplifier ADC High Voltage Power About Presets On Target 0 Volts off Actual 13 Volts Polarity A cc Figure 215 M CA High Voltage Tab
182. ht mode to accommodate particular throughput resolution tradeoffs The optimize feature also automatically adjusts the pole zero setting The dead time per pulse is 3 x Rise Time 2 x Flattop Width In the Pole Zero section the Start button performs a pole zero at the specified rise time and other shaping values Unlike the optimize feature it performs a pole zero for only the one rise time The pole zero Stop button aborts the pole zero and is normally not used When you are satisfied with the settings Close the Properties dialog and prepare to acquire data 62 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Once data acquisition is underway the advanced user may wish to return to MCB Properties and click on the Insight section s Start button to adjust the shaping parameters interactively with a live waveform showing the actual pulse shape or just to verify that all is well 3 2 5 3 Amplifier PRO This tab Fig 76 contains the LFR filter AER xi control which is discussed in detail in High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset the hardware manual To enable Low Amplifier Amplifier2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer Frequency Rejector mode mark the checkbox Unmark the checkbox to turn off the LFR filter NOTE You cannot optimize or pole zero the DSPEC jr 2 0 while in LFR mode The Optimize feature should be used with the LFR filter off Subsequent measurements can then be taken with the LFR filter on
183. ice Pack 2 and Wish to Share Your Local ORTEC MCBs Across a Network NOTE Ifyou do not have instruments connected directly to your PC or do not wish to share your instruments this section does not apply to you If you have installed Windows XP Service Pack 2 and have fully enabled the Windows Firewall as recommended mby Microsoft the default firewall settings will prevent other computers from accessing the CONNECTIONS 32 MCBs connected directly to your PC To share your locally connected ORTEC instruments across a network you must enable File and Printer Sharing on the Windows Firewall Exceptions list To do this 1 From the Windows Control Panel To GA o aia AA access the Windows Firewall entry coi A elelt Era ds Q Back P P Search gt Folders Jv Depending on the appearance of your Er E Address Network Connections Control Panel there are two ways to do this Either open the Windows Network Tasks Firewall item 1f displayed or open the E Create a new connection Network Connections item then choose Oa Change Windows Fire Change Windows Firewall Settings as illustrated in Fig 29 This will open the Figure 29 Change the Firewall Settings Windows Firewall dialog _LAN or High Speed Internet irewalle com 44 Ox 10 100 Integra 2 Go to the Exceptions tab then click to mark the File and Printer Sharing checkbox Fig 30 19 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dia
184. ices NOTE Should you experience difficulties communicating with network MCBs return to this dialog and make sure Intemal network number bovo000d the Frame type setting was saved Adapter In most cases you should choose Auto Detect You should manually configure the Frame type and Network number only if Auto Detect does not work in your enviroment Frame type Ethemet 802 3 X Network number 00000000 Figure 16 Choose the Correct Frame Type 2 1 3 Windows XP Setup To determine whether the NWLink IPX SPX NetBIOS Compatible Transport Protocol is installed to add it or to select it as the default go to the Taskbar and click on Start then Control Panel In the Control Panel under Pick a Category choose Network and Internet Connections Fig 17 A gt Network and Internet Connections e All Programs gt Figure 17 Opening the Control Panel then Network and Internet Connections Under Pick a Control Panel Icon click on Network Connections Fig 18 This will display the LAN or High Speed Internet 2 connections as shown in Fig 19 Figure 18 Network Connections 11 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Address a Network Connections LAN or High Speed Internet Network Tasks i Local Area Connection 2 ls Create a new connection Enabled Set up a home or small B 3 3Com 3C905TX based Ethern office network Figure 19 E
185. ide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting Properties x ADC Stabilizer About Presets 100 00 Real Time Live Time ROI Peak ROI Integral M Overflow Close Figure 174 921 and 921E Presets Tab time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve 155 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs m
186. ield Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report digiDART shaping controls including Amplifier Ampiiier2 apc Stabilizer HighYolage the InSight Virtual Oscilloscope mode a Rise Time Flattop which is discussed in Section 3 3 mo y width faso The many choices of Rise Time allow Tik f 0 03906 Y you to precisely control the tradeoff Pole Zero between resolution and throughput Section 3 8 discusses this tradeoff and contains a guide to choosing rise time according to count rate The value of the rise time parameter in the digiDART Close is roughly equivalent to twice the Figure 114 digiDART Amplifier 2 Tab integration time set on a conventional analog spectroscopy amplifier Thus a digiDART value of 12 us corresponds to 6 us in a conventional amplifier Starting with the nominal value of 12 0 you should increase values of the rise time for better resolution for expected lower count rates or when unusually high count rates are anticipated reduce the rise time for higher throughput with somewhat worse resolution InSight Start Stop Use the up down arrows to adjust the rise time within the range of 0 2 to 23 0 After all the controls have been adjusted return to the Amplifier tab and click on Start Auto The most recent settings are saved in the digiDART firmware even when the power is turned off For the more advanced user the InSight mode allows you t
187. ifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage About Presets MDA Preset r tainty lt lt lt Real Time isso Preset in 1199 98 Live Time Start Chan fo OS Width 16384 ROI Integral Suggest Region T Overflow Close Figure 138 DSPEC Presets Tab counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve 123 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI ch
188. ile If you do not need the ZDT spectrum you should select Off In CONNECTIONS applications the display can show either of the two spectra Use lt F3 gt or Acquire ZDT Display Select to toggle the display between the two spectra In the Compare mode lt F3 gt switches both spectra to the other type and lt Shift F3 gt switches only the compare spectrum This allows you to make all types of comparisons Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maxi mum channel number in the spectrum If set to 16384 the energy scale will be divided into 16384 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings for the DSPEC jr 2 0 Upper and Lower Level Discriminators In the DSPEC jr 2 0 the lower and upper level discriminators are under computer control The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for storage AAA ES High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset 3 2 5 5 Stabilizer Amplifier Amplifier2 AmpliierPRO ADC Stabilizer The DSPEC jr 2 0 has both a gain Gain Stabiization Enabled T Zero Stabilization Enabled stabilizer and a zero stabilize
189. ilizer tab Fig 172 shows the current values for the stabilizers ADC Stabilizer About Presets Aka a ania ON T ansin Enabled f Zero Stebiization Enabled section shows how much adjustmen T Center Chan 0 Center Chan 0 is currently applied The Initialize o O buttons set the adjustment to 0 If the width fi width 1 value approaches 90 or above the Suggest Region Suggest Region amplifier gain should be adjusted so Adjustment Adjustment the stabilizer can continue to function Initialize 0 Initialize 0 when the adjustment value reaches o J 100 the stabilizer cannot make further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the Figure 172 921 and 921E Stabilizer Tab peak currently used for stabilization To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROI the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay active even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 154 3 2 18 3 About This tab
190. imization on the pulse can be seen in the InSight mode on the Amplifier 2 tab Note however that 1f the settings were close to proper adjustment before starting optimization the pulse shape may not change enough for you to see In this situation you also may not notice a change in the shape of the spectrum peaks The most visible effect of incorrect settings is high or low side peak tailing or poor resolution Figure 65 shows the Amplifier 2 tab which accesses the advanced DSPEC Pro shaping controls including the InSight Virtual Oscilloscope mode which is discussed in Section 3 3 The many choices of Rise Time allow you to precisely control the tradeoff between resolution and throughput The value of the rise time parameter in the DSPEC Pro is roughly equivalent Patent number 5 372 363 Patent number 5 821 533 47 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual to twice the integration time set on a x conventional analog spectroscopy High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset amplifier Thus a DSPEC Pro value Amplifier Amplifier2 AmpliierPRO ADC Stabilizer of 12 us corresponds to 6 us in a ee m Rise Time Flattop conventional amplifier Starting with Roo wan joe H the nominal value of 12 0 you should i increase values of the rise time for Beals ja 00000 4 better resolution for expected lower Pole Zero count rates or when unusually high count rates are anticipated
191. ince the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available The ROI Integral preset operates differently than in ORTEC MCBs In the M CA this preset is maintained separately for each distinct ROI Up to 29 ROIs can be marked When the integral of all counts in any single region reaches the preset value acquisition is stopped Note however that this variable integral count feature can only be activated by issuing the SEND_MESSAGE command as part of a JoB file The M CA hardware manual contains the necessary command details Entering an ROI Integral preset on the Acquisition Presets dialog sets the preset the same for all regions 3 2 29 MiniMCA 166 Portable MCA 3 2 29 1 Amplifier Figure 219 shows the Amplifier tab Properties EJ This tab contains the controls for Gain Power About Presets Shaping Time Pole Zero Input Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighYoltage Polarity and Pileup Rejection Gain 1000 00 r Shaping Time r Pole Zeto 0 50 1 50 a fieso y NOTE The changes you make on this eu ea 36 PTE tab take place immediately Fine 1 0000 we ep There is no cancel or undo for Coarse x 1000 7 this dialog Pile up Rejection IV Gain
192. input count rate The settings Auto Fast or Slow are saved in the DSPEC jr even when the power is off The time constant can be manually set on the InSight display see Section 3 3 You can view the time when the baseline restorer is active on the InSight display as a Mark region see the discussion on Marks p 200 In the automatic mode the current value is shown on the InSight sidebar Fig 227 For a low count rate system the value will remain at about 90 Preamplifier Type Use the Preamplifier Type section to choose Transistor Reset or Resistive Feedback preamplifier operation Your choice will depend on the preamplifier supplied with the germanium detector being used Optimize The DSPEC jr is equipped with both automatic pole zero logic and automatic flattop logic The Start Auto optimization button uses these features to automatically choose the best pole zero and flattop tilt settings Note that if you selected Transistor Reset as the Preamplifier Type for this DSPEC jr the Start Auto button does not perform the pole zero As with any system the DSPEC jr should be optimized any time the detector is replaced or if the flattop width is changed For optimization to take place the DSPEC jr must be processing pulses The detector should be connected in its final configuration before optimizing is started There should be a radioactive source near the detector so that the count rate causes a dead time of 5 Dead time is displaye
193. ion Amplifier Amplifier2 AmpifierPRO ADC Stabilizer Enhancer and Enhanced Through put Mode To enable a particular F Low Frequency Rejecter T Resolution Enhancer feature mark the corresponding i Enables resolution enhancement checkbox Any or all of these features for the Gain Stablilzer can be used at one time however L the LFR and enhanced throughput f Enhanced Throughput Mode modes must be set up before the Protection Time 12800 us resolution enhancer is configured as discussed below Note that once an MCB is trained for the Resolution Dose Enhancer see the following section Figure 66 DSPEC Pro Amplifier PRO Tab 1t must be retrained if any settings are changed that can affect peak shape or position e g bias gain rise time flattop PZ Low Frequency Rejector This feature is discussed in detail in the DSPEC Pro hardware manual You cannot optimize or pole zero the DSPEC Pro while in LFR mode The Optimize feature should be used with the LFR filter off Subsequent measurements can then be taken with the LFR filter on Also LFR mode affects the available range of protection times in Enhanced Throughput Mode as discussed in the next paragraph Enhanced Throughput Mode See the hardware manual for a discussion of this feature The valid Protection Time settings in 25 ns increments are 49 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual e LFR mode
194. is entered in powers of 2 e g 2048 1024 512 256 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions Set this level low enough to see the lowest energy feature of interest However avoid setting it so low that it generates a high dead time by accepting noise The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for storage 3 2 7 3 Stabilizer The Stabilizer tab Fig 94 shows the Properties current value for the gain stabilizer The value in the Adjustment section shows how much adjustment is currently Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets applied The Initialize buttons set the Center Chan o adjustment to 0 If the value approaches width o 90 or above the amplifier gain should be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue _Suggest Region Adjustment to function when the adjustment value Initialize 100 reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization Figure 94 DSP Scint Stabilizer Tab To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the S
195. ision Serial Number Acquisition Mode PTRU O01 0005 PHA This screen displays the TRUMP PCI s serial number all TRUMP PCIs have a Lose unique serial number which is read by Figure 177 TRUMP PCI About Tab the software and stored in the spectrum file for verification of the spectrum The PC to which the TRUMP PCTI is attached is shown at the top of the dialog 3 2 19 3 Presets Figure 178 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set on an MCB that ADC About Presets MDA Preset is not acquiring data You can use any fee Uncertainty or all of the presets at one time To I Real Time Preset in disable a preset enter a value of zero wee 102 00 Live Time If you disable all of the presets data Start Chan 0 acquisition will continue until ROI Peak width fT SS manually stopped y PP ROI Integral Suggest Region FF Overflow When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition _ Grose causes the MCB to stop This can be Figure 178 TRUMP PCI Presets Tab 159 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But 1f the sample cont
196. ith an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 22 916 916A ACE and Spectrum ACE 3 2 22 1 ADC This tab Fig 186 contains the Conversion Gain control In addition ADC About Presets the current real time and live time are monitored at the bottom of the dialog Conversion Gain Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to de Real Time Live Time 2048 the energy scale will be divided 0 00 0 00 into 2048 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 2048 Close 1024 512 The up down arrow Figure 186 916 916A ACE and Spectrum ACE ADC buttons step through the valid settings Tab for each instrument type 166 3 2 22 2 About This tab Fig 187 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selected instrument as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the MCB is currently locked with a password Read Write indicates that the MCB is unlocked Read Only means it is locked 3 2 22 3 Presets Figure 188 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data You can use any 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Properties x ADC About Presets SINGLEY_LIZ MCB 1
197. ixed choices Auto Fast and Slow The fast setting is used for high count rates the slow for low count rates Auto adjusts the time constant as appropriate for the input count rate The settings Auto Fast or Slow are saved in the DSPEC jr 2 0 even when the power is off The time constant can be manually set on the InSight display see Section 3 3 You can view the time when the baseline restorer is active on the InSight display as a Mark region see the discussion on Marks p 200 In the automatic mode the current value is shown on the InSight sidebar Fig 227 For a low count rate system the value will remain at about 90 Preamplifier Type Use the Preamplifier Type section to choose Transistor Reset or Resistive Feedback preamplifier operation Your choice will depend on the preamplifier supplied with the germanium detector being used Optimize The DSPEC jr 2 0 is equipped with both automatic pole zero logic and automatic flattop logic The Start Auto optimize button uses these features to automatically choose the best pole zero and flattop tilt settings Note that if you selected Transistor Reset as the Preamplifier Type for this DSPEC jr 2 0 the optimize button does not perform the pole zero 60 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS As with any system the DSPEC jr 2 0 should be optimized any time the detector is replaced or if the flattop width is changed For optimization to take place the DSPEC jr 2 0 must be processing p
198. l be near zero when the bias is turned off x ADC High Voltage About Status Presets On Actual 50 Volts Off Current 45 n On Close Figure 208 OCT TE PC and OCT TE Plus High Voltage Tab While the Properties dialog is open the computer monitors the OCT TE PC in real time continuously updating the Actual voltage leakage Current and chamber pressure information 3 2 27 3 About This tab Fig 209 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selected OCT TE as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description The Access field shows whether the MCB is currently locked with a password Read Write indicates that the MCB is unlocked Read Only means it is locked This screen displays the OCT TE s serial number all OCTETEs have a unique serial number which is read by the software and stored in the spectrum x ADC HighVoltage About Status Presets OCTE 133 Input 1 Sample lauaback Acquisition Start Time 113 47 11 Tuesday August 22 2000 Access Read Write Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode OCTE 003 133 PHA Close Figure 209 OCTETE PC and OCTETE Plus About Tab file for verification of the spectrum The OCTETE input currently being monitored is shown at the top of the dialog 184 3 2 27 4 Status The Status tab Fig 210 monitors the currently selected OCT TE chamber s pressure Cham
199. large counts not in the peak will have an effect on the stabilization The ROI can be cleared after the PEAK command so that peak count preset can be used on another peak The zero stabilization dialog Initialize button sets the zero offset to its midpoint that is halfway between minimum offset and maximum offset This should be done before selecting the ROI for the peak because the initialization might move the peak in the spectrum and because it ensures that the maximum range is available for the stabilization process The Suggest button is used to set the peak center and peak width of the peak area used by the stabilizer Before selecting this command the ROI must be marked and the marker put in the region to be used When operating the peak will be centered in the ROI After the region has been recorded the stabilization is turned on If the stabilization is turned on when this command is executed the old stabilization region is replaced by the new peak defined by the marker and stabilization continues using the new peak The Zero Stabilizer Enabled checkbox enables or disables the zero stabilization It can only be turned on after the Suggest button has been used to select a working peak 203 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 6 ZDT Mode An extended live time clock increases the collection time real time of the acquisition to correct for input pulse train losses incurred during acquisition due to syste
200. lated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield The calculated value is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition is stopped 31 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Coefficients A B and C can be entered as numbers If the application such as GammaVision supports MDA calculations you can click on the Suggest button to enter from an internal table the values for the MDA type selected The MDA type should be chosen before the preset is selected here Select the Nuclide and Energy from the droplists The Nuclide list contains all the nuclides in the working library The Energy list shows all the gamma ray energies for the selected nuclide in the library Properties for transSPEC Amplifier Amplifier 2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage MDA Preset Nuclide Report Add New _Updete_ Delete Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nucl Energy MDA Preset Correction c Nuclide Ag 10M Energy 446 80 w keY Coefficients A 3 000000 B 2 000000 C 3 000000 Figure 45 trans SPEC MDA Preset Tab If the application supports efficiency calibration and the MCB is efficiency calibrated the MDA is entered in the units selected in the application If the unit is not efficiency calibrated e g in MAESTRO which does not support efficiency calibration the MDA field is labeled Correction t
201. lays the Detective s fixed High Yoltage Field Data About Status Presets Rise Time and Flattop Width settings Amplifier Amplier2 Amplifier PRO ADC You can also use the InSight Virtual Oscilloscope mode see Section 3 3 to view the digital signal processor s actual sampled waveform on a reference graticule however the shaping settings cannot be adjusted Rise Time Flattop Width 10 80 Tilt 0 00000 InSight Start Stop Close Figure 56 Detective Amplifier 2 Tab 3 2 3 3 Amplifier PRO Figure 57 shows the Amplifier PRO tab which contains the Low Fre High Voltage Field Data About Status Presets quency Rejector LFR filter control Amplifier Amplifier 2 AmplifierPRO apc This control is always on and cannot be changed Close Figure 57 Detective Amplifier PRO Tab 40 3 2 3 4 ADC This tab Fig 58 allows you to view the conversion gain lower and upper level discriminator settings and monitor the current real time live time and count rate The Detective operates at a fixed conversion gain of 8192 channels and the LLD and ULD cannot be adjusted 3 2 3 5 High Voltage Figure 59 shows the High Voltage tab which allows you to monitor the Actual bias You cannot adjust the bias voltage or turn it on and off these functions are factory set The Shutdown is fixed as SMART a reference to the Detective s SMART 1 de
202. led instructions on using the InSight mode 3 2 12 3 ADC This tab Fig 134 contains the Gate Conversion Gain and Lower Level Discriminator controls In addition the current real time and live time are monitored at the bottom of the dialog Gate The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating function With this function Off no gating is performed that is all detector signals are processed with the function in Coincidence a 120 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS gating input signal must be present at OO x the proper time for the conversion of ray Presets MDA Preset the event in Anti coincidence the Amplifier Amplifier 2 ADC Stabilizer HighYoltage gating input signal must not be present Gate E J for the conversion of the detector signal Off The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak detect peak maximum 6384 0 Lower Level Disc 5 Real Ti Live Ti Conversion Gain AS distales 6 40 16 36 The Conversion Gain sets the maxi mum channel number in the spectrum _ Close If set to 16384 the energy scale will Figure 134 DSPEC ADC Tab be divided into 16384 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings for the DSPEC Lower Level Discriminator The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored I
203. les will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve Figure 202 MicroACE Presets Tab The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB 177 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in an
204. libration and the 92X II is efficiency calibrated the MDA is entered in the units selected in the application If the unit is not efficiency calibrated e g in MAESTRO which does not support efficiency calibration the MDA field is labeled Correction the efficiency Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset operates as before If the Correction 131 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual factor 1s the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA preset will function normally 3 2 14 DART 3 2 14 1 Amplifier Figure 147 shows the Amplifier tab Properties ES This tab contains the controls for Gain Power abr status Presets Shaping Time Preamplifier Type Amplifier ADC Stablizer HighVoltage FieldData Pole Lero Input Polarity and Pileup Gain 13 46 Shaping Time Pole Zero Rejection Be sure that all of the 0 30 100 fecous y Start Auto_ controls on the tabs have been set OA eons A Preamplifier Type Stop Auto_ before clicking the Start Auto pole zero button Resistor Feedback 2345 3 m Input Polarity NOTE The changes you make on this He Co tab take place immediately Pile up Rejection There is no cancel or undo for this dialog Figure 147 DART Amplifier Tab Gain Set the amplifier coarse gain by selecting from the Coarse droplist then adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the
205. lient 3525 5 o2 GROSSE ROSSA sonrt ART EROS ERER OR ER 7 2 1 2 Windows 2000 Setup cortan ASADA 7 23 Windows XP CID cs 22k ioe need eaten a e ced ria pes 11 2 2 Adding New CONNECTIONS 32 Software Hardware and Driver Updates to Your So Rae ee a eee ee re nee ee I een 15 2 2 1 Installing a New Software Application 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 15 2 2 2 Installing a CONNECTIONS 32 Driver Update Kit Included with an ORTEC Software or Hardware Product oooooooooooooooomorrrrono 18 2 2 3 If You Have Windows XP Service Pack 2 and Wish to Share Your Local ORTEC MCBs Across a Network oo ooooooccooooromornorom o s 19 2 3 Configuration of the Master MCB List 20 cvaccdedecavanieecasndeicaavacieecs 20 2 4 Re Running the MCB Configuration Program to Update the Master Instrument A O eee E eee 23 2 5 Detector Security dr E is 23 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS sisavuscrsiderc rs dde 25 Silo Introductio irradia oa 25 3 2 MCB Properties Di l gs 0 cas rra desa 25 32 1 trans SPEC er rr id ds 25 E kl Amplifier creser eness ipi e TEET ee eeee e g Ea PEE E A EEE sass 25 3 2 1 2 Amplifier 2 see rann raat io bu aoe Ree eee WEES ae ER E 26 3 2 1 3 Amplifier PRO ada dra ts 26 el LA ADO aa deh he pb Soha does Bau Ree ito A ES 27 3215 A 27 3 2 0 High Voltage rro aa 28 EN Wile Odds prie pnra n re aae tee e aa E eE Ea Ea 28 lios ADO sone ee eea e E E E eE e sees 29 Slds SaS sra rss oe laa iia ro blas 29 A ee eae ea hee ee mee ee 30 3 2 1 11 M
206. ll time is based on the time required for each pulse to reach its peak value This peaking time is about twice that indicated by the conventional time constants displayed on the front panel of commercial analog amplifiers For example germanium detectors are often specified at a 6 us time constant this setting is equivalent to 12 us peaking rise time in our digital spectrometers Up to some value of rise 12 time one can expect 10 improved resolution with 2 increasing rise time there E 2 8 will however be a tradeoff 2n in maximum throughput to So of 4 memory Figure 230 illustrates 5 an example of this tradeoff 2 ORTEC digital spectrometers o operate well above the peak 1 5 9 15 20 30 50 75 95 105 120 130 140 of the throughput curve Count Rate kcps Operating there allows these instruments to handle an Figure 230 An Example of the Tradeoff Between Throughput and even higher rate of incoming Count Rate counts but with less data into memory and therefore longer counting time to the same detection limit It is possible to move the peak of the curve to the right more counts to memory with higher input count rate by reducing the pulse rise and fall time thereby trading off resolution for maximum count rate Table 1 is a guide to choosing a count rate that will ensure that the most efficient operation of your digital spectrometer over the range of anticipated input count rates for your application that is
207. logs Manual Windows Firewall x General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall is blocking incoming network connections except for the programs and services selected below Adding exceptions allows some programs to work better but might increase your security risk Programs and Services File and Printer Sharing O Remote Assistance O Remote Desktop O UPrP Framework Add Program Add Port Edit Delete IV Display a notification when Windows Firewall blocks a program What are the risks of allowing exceptions Cancel Figure 30 Turn on File and Printer Sharing NOTE This affects only the ability of other users on your network to access your MCBs You are not required to turn on File and Printer Sharing in order to access networked MCBs as long as those PCs are configured to grant remote access 3 To learn more about exceptions to the Windows Firewall click on the What are the risks of allowing exceptions link at the bottom of the dialog 4 Click on OK to close the dialog No restart is required 2 3 Configuration of the Master MCB List The initial master list of MCBs available to the ORTEC programs on your PC is determined by the MCB Configuration program which you run as part of software installation or update or after installing a new MCB piece of hardware see Section 2 2 When MCB Configuration runs it searches the PC and the network 1f any for MCBs then displays a m
208. lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions Setting that level above random noise increases useful throughput because the MCB is not unproductively occupied processing noise pulses The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions 158 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Zero Adjustment The Zero Adjustment is used to set the dc offset voltage on the preamplifier input The control ranges plus and minus with 2048 being O V offset The setting is normally O V or slightly negative Setting the value too far in the positive direction above 2048 can cause lock up by putting the input value above the pulse reset discriminator value A lock up has occurred if the live time stops and the real time continues to count The full range of offset is 125 mV Therefore a setting of 3100 corresponds to a zero offset of 64 2 mV 3 2 19 2 About This tab Fig 177 displays hardware and firmware information about the ADC About Presets MDA Preset currently selected TRUMP PCI as well LAB 03 MCB 25 as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description The Access field f Sampl shows whether the MCB is currently A locked with a password Read Write ae F ecquisition Start ime ccess indicates that the MCB is unlocked nkan I Read Wite Read Only means it is locked Firmware Rev
209. ltage Tab 143 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 15 5 About This tab Fig 160 displays hardware xi and firmware information about the Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets currently selected 92X NOMAD or INPUT 1 NOMAD Plus as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access Sample i o field shows whether the MCB is currently locked with a password a a 7 ee A JU uesgar Augus r ea nte Read Write indicates that the MCB F ie Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode is unlocked Read Only means it is 0825007 C PHA locked Close 3 2 15 6 Presets Figure 160 92X NOMAD NOMAD Plus About Tab Figure 161 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled xl set to a non zero value the first Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can 60 00 Real Time be useful when you are analyzing ae Live Ti samples of widely varying activity d and do not know the general activity ROI Peak before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set
210. lth OK the units reported by the DSPEC jr DIM 4124 State Of Heath OK Security Detector temperature DIM 124 State Of Heat OK and Live detector temperature are available only for SMART 1 detectors Lz DIM 24V State Of Heath For non SMART 1 detectors they y lor Temperature State Of Health OK respond with N A The parameters are Figure 110 DSPEC jr Status Tab Detector State of Health This is OK if all the SOH are OK and ERR if any one is ERR DIM 24V State of Health This is OK if the 24 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 24 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 12V State of Health This is OK if the 12 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 12 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 12V State of Health This is OK if the 12 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 12 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 24V State of Health This is OK if the 24 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 24 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared Temperature State of Health This is OK if the detector temperature has stayed below the high temperature limit set in the detector since the last time the SOH was cleared This is available only for SMART 1 detectors 90 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS High Voltage State of Health This is OK if the HV supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 V of specified bias voltage since the last tim
211. m dead time This corrected time value known as the live time 1s then used to determine the net peak count rates necessary to determine nuclide activities As an example consider the case where the spectrometry amplifier and ADC are 25 dead during the acquisition If a live time preset of 100 seconds is selected the spectrometer counts for a total of 133 33 seconds real time The extra 33 33 seconds make up for the gamma rays lost due to system busy time The total counts in a peak can then be divided by 100 to determine the number of gamma rays per second recorded in the spectrum Unfortunately extending the counting time to make up for losses due to system busy results in an incorrect result if the gamma ray flux is changing as a function of time If an isotope with a very short half life is placed in front of the detector the spectrometer might start out with a very high dead time but the isotope will decay during the count and there will be no dead time If the spectrometer extends the counting time to make up for the lost counts 1t will no longer be counting the same source as when the losses occurred As a result the number of counts in the peak will not be correct When the MCB operates in ZDT mode it adjusts for the dead time losses by taking very short acquisitions and applying a correction in real time that is as the data are coming in to the number of counts in the spectrum This technique allows the gamma ray fl
212. ments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the Detector is available to accept another pulse i e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the Detector is not available 38 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the Detector in which case that Detector continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this Detector marked with an ROI reaches this value This has no function if no ROIs are marked in the Detector Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 3 Detective 3 2 3 1 Amplifier Figure 55 shows the Amplifier tab This tab displays the controls for the High Voltage FieldData About Status Presets Coarse and Fine Gain which are Amplifier Amplifier2 AmplfierPRO ADC factory preset and cannot be changed Gaiu Fine 0 5198 Coarse Ro v Figure 55 Detective Amplifier Tab 39 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 3 2 Amplifier 2 Figure 56 shows the Amplifier 2 tab which disp
213. more features than the 921 as explained beginning in Section 3 2 18 5 3 2 18 1 ADC This tab Fig 171 contains the Gate and Conversion Gain controls In addition the current real time and live time are aor Conversion Gain Properties x ADC Stabilizer About Presets Dif monitored at the bottom of the dialog Gate The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating function With this function Bese eae ene Off no gating is performed that is all on E detector signals are processed with the Close function in Coincidence a gating input Figure 171 921 and 921E ADC Tab 153 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak detect peak maximum Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to 16384 the energy scale will be divided into 16384 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings 3 2 18 2 Stabilizer The 921 and 921E have both a gain stabilizer and a zero stabilizer Gain and zero stabilization are discussed in detail in Sections 3 4 and 3 5 respectively The Stab
214. mples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a Safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected Detector are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the Detector clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the Detector is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the Detector is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the Detector in which case that Detector continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this Detector marked with an ROI reaches this value This has no function if no ROIs are marked in the Detector Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 co
215. mplifier Figure 47 shows the Amplifier tab This tab displays the controls for the Coarse High Voltage Field Data About Status Presets and Fine Gain which are factory preset Amplifier Ampifier2 AmpifierPRO ADC and cannot be changed The fine gain 1s Gain 1 20 changed when the recalibration is redone Fine 0 600d Coarse Ix 2 y Figure 47 Detective EX Amplifier Tab 3 2 2 2 Amplifier 2 Figure 48 shows the Amplifier 2 tab Properties for Detective EX MCB 133 which displays the Detective EX fixed High Voltage Field Data About Status Presets Rise Time and Flattop Width settings Amplifier Amplier2 Amplifier PRO ADC You can also use the InSight Virtual Oscilloscope mode see Section 3 3 to view the digital signal processor s actual sampled waveform on a reference graticule however the shaping settings cannot be adjusted m Rise Time Flattop ad Width 0 80 tit 0 00781 Insight Start Stop Figure 48 Detective EX Amplifier 2 Tab 34 3 2 2 3 Amplifier PRO Figure 49 shows the Amplifier PRO tab which contains the Low Fre quency Rejector LFR filter control This control is always on and cannot be changed 3 2 2 4 ADC This tab Fig 50 allows you to view the conversion gain lower and upper level discriminator settings and monitor the current real time live time and count rate The Detective
216. n the DSPEC this is under computer control in older systems it was implemented via a hard ware potentiometer adjustment This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions Setting that level above random noise increases useful throughput because the MCB is then not unproductively occupied processing noise pulses 3 2 12 4 Stabilizer The DSPEC has both a gain stabilizer and a zero stabilizer These are discussed Ea ei AAE f Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage in detail in Sections 3 4 and 3 5 respectively T Zero Stabilization Enabled Center Chan 3 Center Chan 2335 The Stabilizer tab Fig 135 shows the Width 19 Width 23 current values for the stabilizers The Suggest Region Suggest Region value in each Adjustment section f m Adjustment gt shows how much ad ASUME nt 1 umeni Initialize 0 Initialize 0 ly applied The Initialize buttons set the adjustment to 0 If the value approaches 90 or above the amplifier Close gain should be adjusted so the stabilizer Figure 135 DSPEC Stabilizer Tab 121 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual can continue to function when the adjustment value reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization To enable the stabilizer e
217. n the digiDART display in the stored spectrum list Note that this only moves the spectrum inside the digiDART To save the current active spectrum to the PC disk use the File Save commands in the application The Acquire Download Spectra command can also be used to download all the stored spectra and save them to disk automatically They can then be viewed in a buffer window 3 2 10 7 About This tab Fig 1 19 disp lays hardware Amplifier Amplifier 2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage and firmware information about the Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report currently selected digiDART as well digiDART s n 241 as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition TE i am the Access field shows whether the f Calibration source 1714 MCB is currently locked with a R Write indi h Acquisition Start Time Access p assword ead rite indicates that 11 17 51 Tuesday January 09 2001 Read Write the MCB 18 unlocked Read Only Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode means it is locked DDAR 002 P23 PHA Figure 119 digiDART About Tab 101 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 10 8 Status Figure 120 shows the Status tab Twenty one parameters are monitored Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage at all times Use the droplists to select Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report any Si
218. nals are processed with the function in Coincidence a gating input signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector 182 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS signal The gating signal must occur EE xi prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds ADC High Votage About Status Presets beyond peak detect peak maximum q Gate Conversion Gain H An external oscilloscope is needed to Of check this timing Digital Offset 300 Conversion Gain and Digital Offset The Digital Offset and Conversion Gain are used to control the starting energy and energy range of the spectrum collected In many cases the low energy portion of the spectrum contains no data of interest and can be discarded The OCTETE PC uses digital offset in the MCB to accomplish this The conversion gain is the number of channels corresponding to a full scale input of 10 V In the OCTETE PC the amplifier gain is set at the factory so that a 10 MeV alpha particle corresponds to a 10 V output All amplifier connections are internal to the system Real Time Live Time 604807 20 604800 00 Figure 207 OCT TE PC and OCT TE Plus ADC Tab Table 2 shows the offset and gain settings Table 2 Offset and Conversion Gain Settings with the spectrum size set to 512 channels Starting Ending Olet Mina for some commonly used spectrum energy Energy
219. nd Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the MCB aoe is currently locked with a password is is a test job function e Acquisition Start Time Access Read Write indicates that the MCB is an a 14 30 07 Sunday August 09 2020 Read Write unlocked Read Only means it is E a locked Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode OcKed 0918 074 Unknown PHA 3 2 21 3 Presets Close Figure 185 shows the Presets tab The Figure 184 918 About Tab presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled Properties ne x set to a non zero value the first ADC About Presets condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can RealTime be useful when you are analyzing UR a Live Time samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity RDIPeak before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that ee sufficient counts can be obtained for Overflow proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if Close the sample contains a large amount of Figure 185 918 Presets Tab this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting tim
220. nd automatic flattop logic The Start Auto optimization button uses these features to automatically choose the best pole zero and flattop tilt settings Note that if you selected Transistor Reset as the Preamplifier Type for this DSPEC Plus the Start Auto button does not perform the pole zero As with any system the DSPEC Plus should be optimized any time the detector is replaced or if the flattop width or cusp parameter is changed For optimization to take place the DSPEC Plus must be processing pulses The detector should be connected in its final configuration before optimizing is started There should be a radioactive source near the detector so that the count rate causes a dead time of 5 Dead time is displayed on the DSPEC Plus front panel and on the Status Sidebar during data acquisition 109 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Select either the Resistive Feedback or Transistor Reset option and click on Start Auto The optimize command is sent to the DSPEC Plus at this time and if the DSPEC Plus is able to start the operation a series of short beeps sounds to indicate that optimization is in progress When optimizing is complete the beeping stops During optimization pole zeroes are performed for several rise time values and the DSPEC Plus 1s cycled through all the rise time values for the determination of the optimum tilt values As all of the values for all the combinations are maintained in the DSPEC Plus
221. nected from the 0 Stored Spectra PC The spectrum can then be viewed in the application as the active spectrum in the MCB The active spectrum is the figure 195 MicroNOMAD Field Data Tab spectrum where the new data are collected The current active spectrum is lost When the MicroNOMAD is in field mode the spectrum is collected in the active spectrum position until the preset is met and then it is stored as the next stored spectrum The microNOMAD waits until the next trigger and then starts the collection of the new spectrum 172 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS NOTE If the MicroNOMAD is in field mode and you attempt to access it within a CONNECTIONS application the following message will be displayed at the bottom of the program window Start or Stop Error Not Allowed During Current Mode Go to the Field Data tab to exit field mode The lower left of the tab shows the total number of spectra not counting the active spectrum stored in the MicroNOMAD memory The spectrum ID of the active spectrum is shown in the lower right The stored spectra cannot be viewed or stored in the computer until they are moved to the active spectrum position To move a spectrum from the stored memory to the active memory enter the spectrum number and click on Move Use the up down arrow buttons to scroll through the list of spectra The label on the lower right does not update until a spectrum is moved Note that this only move
222. nel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command which is discussed in Section 3 7 Note that the Suggest Region button is not displayed during data acquisition 186 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 27 7 OCTETE Plus MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 212 stops data collection when the minimum detectable activity for a single user specified MDA nuclide reaches the designated value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammaVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA a y b c Counts Live time Eff x Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The Yield branching ratio is read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield The calculated value is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and w
223. ngs are changed The effect of optimization on the pulse can be seen in the InSight mode on the Amplifier 2 tab Note however that if the settings were close to proper adjustment before starting optimization the pulse shape might not change enough for you to see In this situation you also might not notice a change in the shape of the spectrum peaks The most visible effect of incorrect settings 1s high or low side peak tailing or poor resolution 3 2 12 2 Amplifier 2 Figure 133 shows the Amplifier 2 tab xj which accesses the advanced DSPEC rer Presets MDA Preset resolution throughput and shaping Amplifier Ampifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage controls including the InSight Virtual m Rise Time Flattop Oscilloscope mode see Section 3 3 hzo n The Rise Time field allows you to Cusp ZA precisely control the tradeoff between foo Pole Zero resolution and throughput Section 3 8 InSight _Start _Stop discusses this tradeoff and contains a _Stat Stop a2 a guide to choosing rise time according to count rate The value of the rise time parameter in the DSPEC is roughly Close equivalent to twice the integration time Figure 133 DSPEC Amplifier 2 Tab set on a conventional analog spectro scopy amplifier Thus a DSPEC value of 12 corresponds to 6 in a conventional amplifier Starting with the nominal value of 12 0 you should increase values of the
224. ning MAESTRO as illustrated in Fig 232 MAESTRO 32 MCBSERVE 4 ETHERNET DL ii o A o eee a o a E a ne en wn wpe oo ow BP ee nen on wn ne ee enna ne een ney 4 1 1 1 a 1 Y 1 1 MAESTRO 32 MCBSERVE mee wee MN mea Figure 232 Example Network Setup Each time CONNECTIONS software is installed on a PC in the network and the network is connected and operational the MCB Configuration program will find all the MCBs attached to PCs on which the MCB Server program is running It will then build a Master Instrument List update the local PC s MCB pick list so that is identical to the Master Instrument List and optionally broadcast the new Master Instrument List to all PCs that are connected to the network and currently running MCB Server 213 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual At this point your CONNECTIONS program is ready to use The MCB pick list for each CONNECTIONS program on each PC in the system can be tailored to a specific list of MCBs A 2 Port 292 or Page D Conflict In some PCs and laptops output port 292Hex is used for a system reset reboot signal In some PCs memory page D is not available These two conditions conflict with the use of an ISA Dual Port Memory card Therefore the ISA version of the DPM card cannot be used in PCs that use port 292 or page D Symptoms of this conflict include system failure or spontaneous rebooting each time you attempt to start a CONNEC
225. nnection 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION Click on the Properties button to open the Local Area Connection Properties Local Area Connection Properties dialog General shown in Fig 12 Connect using BY 3Com EtherLink Ill ISA 3C509 3C509b in Legacy mode Configure Components checked are used by this connection 1 Client for Microsoft Networks Y A File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Y Internet Protocol TCP IP Uninstall Properties Description Allows your computer to access resources on a Microsoft network Show icon in taskbar when connected OK Cancel Figure 12 LAN Properties To add the NWLink IPX SPX NetBIOS Select Network Component Type ajx Compatible Transport Protocol click on the Install button This will open the Select Click the type of network component you want to install Network Component Type dialog Fig 13 E Client Click on Protocol to display the Select e Network Protocol dialog shown in Fig 14 Description A protocol is a language your computer uses to communicate with other computers Add Cancel Figure 13 Add a New Protocol ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Click on NWLink IPX SPX x NetBIOS Compatible Transport l Click the Network Protocol that you want to install then click OK If you have Protocol then click on OK to Y an installation disk f
226. nput signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak detect peak maximum Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to 16384 the energy scale will be divided into 16384 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings 3 2 15 3 Stabilizer The 92X NOMAD and NOMAD Plus xi have both a gain stabilizer and a zero Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets stabilizer Gain and zero stabilization ate disouesed ideti Sections Da J Gain Stabilization Enabled gt J Zero Stabilization Enabled and 3 5 respe ctiv ely Center Chan 25 Center Chan 25 Width 150 Width 151 The Stabilizer tab Fig 158 shows the Suggest Region Suggest Region current values for the stabilizers The haan cata value in each Adjustment section Iniiaize 0 Iniiaize 0 shows how much adjustment is currently applied The Initialize buttons set the adjustment to 0 If the value approaches Close 90 or above the amplifier gain should Figure 158 92X NOMAD NOMAD Plus Stabilizer Tab 142 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue to function when the adjustment value reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make further corrections in
227. ntains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected Detector are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the Detector clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the Detector is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the Detector is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the Detector in which case that Detector continues counting until the count is manually stopped 57 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Enter the ROI I
228. ntegral preset value in counts With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this Detector marked with an ROI reaches this value This has no function if no ROIs are marked in the Detector The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample may be lower than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROI the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak
229. nter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROI the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay active even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 3 2 12 5 High Voltage Figure 136 shows the High Voltage x tab The On and Off buttons apply and ray eee MDA Preset remove the high voltage This function Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage is overridden by the detector bias On Target 1400 Volt remote shutdown signal from the os Si detector high voltage cannot be orf enabled if the remote shutdown or overload signals prevent it The Target voltage level is displayed on this tab but cannot be modified from OF the dialog It is controlled by the hardware and can be adjusted by a rear panel potentiometer High voltage polarity is set with an internal jumper Figure 136 DSPEC High Voltage Tab See the DSPEC hardware manual for more information 122 3 2 12 6 About This tab Fig 137 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selec
230. o directly view all the parameters and adjust them interactively while collecting live data To access the InSight mode go to the InSight section on the Amplifier 2 tab and click on Start Note that the Amplifier 2 tab graphically presents a modeled shape This is not a sampled waveform of the actual pulse shape only a model based on the current parameters The modeled shape is nominally a quasi trapezoid whose sides and top can be adjusted by the controls in this dialog While a particular control is being adjusted the model is updated to represent the changes made 97 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The Rise Time value is for both the rise and fall times thus changing the rise time has the effect of spreading or narrowing the quasi trapezoid symmetrically The Flattop controls adjust the top of the quasi trapezoid The Width adjusts the extent of the flattop from 0 3 to 2 4 us The Tilt adjustment varies the flatness of this section slightly The Tilt can be positive or negative Choosing a positive value results in a flattop that slopes downward choosing a negative value gives an upward slope Alternatively the optimize feature on the Amplifier tab can set the tilt value automatically This automatic value is normally the best for resolution but it can be changed on this dialog and in the InSight mode to accommodate particular throughput resolution tradeoffs The optimize feature also automatically adjus
231. o that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample Lose contains a large amount of this or Figure 191 917 Presets Tab another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve Overflow 169 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI c
232. o value until the tail disappears 3 Make a final adjustment to balance the symmetry of the peak as closely as possible to the symmetry observed at low counting rates This will result in the optimum pole zero adjustment 3 2 7 2 ADC Prnperties This tab Fig 93 contains the Gate Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets Conversion Gain and Lower coe pane ee Level and Upper Level Discriminator Of controls In addition the current real Lower Level Disc 1 time live time and count rate are Upper Level Dise 2047 H monitored at the bottom of the dialog The Gate control allows you to select Real Time Live Time a logic gating function With this 232 00 232 00 Count Rate 0 function Off no gating is performed that is all detector signals are processed In Coincidence mode a Figure 93 DSP Scint ADC Tab 77 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual gating input signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event In Anticoincidence mode the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 ns beyond peak detect peak maximum NOTE The DSP Scint ensures that the minimum length of the gating signal is 4 us The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to 2048 the energy scale will be divided into 2048 channels The conversion gain
233. ocessing noise pulses The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions Stabilizer The DSPEC Plus has both a gain stabilizer and a zero stabilizer These are discussed in detail in Sections 3 4 and 3 5 respectively The Stabilizer tab Fig 127 shows the current values for the stabilizers The About Presets MDA Preset value in each Adjustment section Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer High Voltage shows how much adjustment is currently 7 Gan Sean Enebled IV Zero Stabilization Enabled applied The Initialize buttons set the Center Chan 200 Center Chan 100 adjustment to 0 If the value approaches tie Width 100 Width 20 90 or above the amplifier gain should be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue Suggest Region Suggest Region to function when the adjustment value Adjustment Adjustment reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make Initialize 0 Initialize 0 further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization Figure 127 DSPEC Plus Stabilizer Tab To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marke
234. oefficients A B and C can be ee x entered as numbers If the application Amplifier Amplfier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage such as GammaVision supports MDA About Presets MDA Preset calculations you can click on the EEEIEE EE Suggest button to enter from an internal table the values for the MDA posa type selected The MDA type should be ese chosen before the preset is selected ee Peale at here k Correction c A 0 500000 Nuclide Ag110M y B 0 250000 Suggest Select the Nuclide and Energy from Energy 446 80 z kev C 2 000000 the droplists The Nuclide list contains all the nuclides in the working library Close The Energy list shows all the gamma Figure 139 DSPEC MDA Preset Tab ray energies for the selected nuclide in the library If the application supports efficiency calibration and the DSPEC is efficiency calibrated the MDA is entered in the units selected in the application If the unit is not efficiency calibrated e g in MAESTRO which does not support efficiency calibration the MDA field is labeled Correction the efficiency Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset operates as before If the Correction 125 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual factor 1s the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA preset will function normally 3 2 13 92X Il 3 2 13 1 Amplifier Figure 140 shows the Amplifier tab x This tab contains the controls
235. ompared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition is stopped 70 Coefficients A B and C can be entered as numbers If the application such as GammaVision supports MDA calculations you can click on the Suggest button to enter from an internal table the values for the MDA type selected The MDA type should be chosen before the preset is selected here Select the Nuclide and Energy from the droplists The Nuclide list contains all the nuclides in the working library The Energy list shows all the gamma ray energies for the selected nuclide in the library 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS xi Amplifier Amplifier2 AmplifierPRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset Add Hew MDA Preset Update Delete MDA Preset Coefficients Correction c A 0 000000 Nuclide Ag 170M gt B 0 000000 Energy y ke E 0 000000 Close Figure 83 DSPEC jr 2 0 MDA Preset Tab If the application supports efficiency calibration and the MCB is efficiency calibrated the MDA is entered in the units selected in the application If the unit is not efficiency calibrated e g in MAESTRO which does not support efficiency calibration the MDA field is labeled Correction the efficiency Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset operates as before If the Correction factor is the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA pr
236. ompared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition is stopped Coefficients A B and C can be x entered as numbers If the application ADC About Presets MDA Preset such as GammaVision supports j Add N MDA calculations you can click on MDA Preset Nuclide Energy _AddNew the Suggest button to enter from an Update internal table the values for the MDA Delete MDA Preset Coefficients Correction cA A 2 71 0000 Nuclide A9 110M y B 0 000000 Energy 446 80 y keV EE 21 700000 type selected The MDA type should be chosen before the preset is selected here Suggest Select the Nuclide and Energy from the droplists The Nuclide list contains all the nuclides in the working library Figure 165 MatchMaker MDA Preset Tab The Energy list shows all the gamma ray energies for the selected nuclide in the library If the application supports efficiency calibration and the MatchMaker is efficiency calibrated the MDA is entered in the units selected in the application If the unit is not efficiency calibrated e g in MAESTRO which does not support efficiency calibration the MDA field is labeled Correction the efficiency Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset operates as before If the Correction 148 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS factor 1s the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA preset will function normally 3 2 17
237. on the network default protocol must be set to the IPX SPX Compatible Transport with NetBIOS selection on all PCs that use CONNECTIONS hardware For instructions on making this the default see the network protocol setup discussion in Section 2 1 9 To start the MCB Configuration program on your PC click on Start Programs the name of your application and MCB Configuration Alternatively you can go to c Program Files Common Files ORTEC Shared Umcbi and run MCBCON32 EXE The MCB Configuration program will locate all of the powered on ORTEC MCBs attached to the local PC and to powered on network PCs display the list of instruments found allow you to enter customized instrument numbers and descriptions and optionally write this configuration to those other network PCs See Section 2 3 for instructions on customizing instrument numbers and descriptions If this is the first time you have installed ORTEC software on your system be sure to read the information on initial system configuration in Section 2 3 If you did not receive a CONNECTIONS 32 Driver Update Kit Part No 797230 your system is now ready to use If you received the driver update kit go to Section 2 2 2 NOTE You can enable other device drivers later with the Windows Add Remove Programs utility on the Control Panel Select Connections 32 from the program list choose Add Remove then elect to Modify the software setup This will reopen the Instrument Setup dialog so yo
238. on supplied with your Windows software and familiarize yourself with a few simple applications before proceeding The convention used in this manual to represent actual keys pressed is to enclose the key label within angle brackets for example lt F1 gt For key combinations the key labels are joined by a within the angle brackets for example lt Alt 2 gt 1 INTRODUCTION This reference manual contains the information you will need to set up your ORTEC multichannel buffers MCBs for data acquisition in CONNECTIONS 32 programs such as MAESTRO 32 GammaVision 32 Renaissance 32 ScintiVision 32 ISOTOPIC 32 and AlphaVision 32 Use this manual in conjunction with the user manuals for your particular CONNECTIONS application and hardware The individual application software manuals contain the MCB Property dialogs for the one or two MCBs most commonly used with that application However all CONNECTIONS 32 applications can use any of our more than 35 CONNECTIONS 32 MCBs therefore this reference manual is intended to provide complete acquisition setup information for all supported MCBs in production at the time this manual was published In addition to the MCB Properties setup information that comprises most of this manual Chapter 2 contains general information on adding new CONNECTIONS 32 software and hardware to your system including driver updates that enable you to use our newest instruments In addition Chapter
239. or is not available 3 2 7 DSP Scint 3 2 7 1 Amplifier Figure 92 shows the Amplifier tab Properties which contains the Gain control Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets Set the amplifier coarse gain by Gain 5 00 Pole Zero selecting from the Coarse droplist 5x D to 910x then adjust the Fine gain Input Polarity with the horizontal slider bar or the Fine 0 4999 HC Et edit box in the range of 0 5 to 2 00 Coarse x10 v The resulting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section The two controls used together cover the entire range of amplification from 2 5 to 1820 Figure 92 DSP Scint Amplifier Tab The Input Polarity radio buttons select the preamplifier input signal polarity for the signal from the detector Normally preamplifiers used with Nal Tl detectors have a negative signal Occasionally a preamplifier with a positive output polarity might be encountered check the specifications for the PMT base and preamplifier you have chosen Pole Zero Adjustment To maintain optimum energy resolution and peak position stability to high counting rates it is important to enter the correct value for the pole zero cancellation As a starting point use the exponential decay time constant that is appropriate for the preamplifier supplying the signal to the DSP Scint input This initial value can be obtained from the preamplifier manufacturer s data sheet or by measuring the ex
240. or overwrite these spectra They are retained in the Detective memory until you delete them with the Erase All Stored Spectra command under the Detective s Administrative Menu as described in the Detective Administrator s manual The lower left of the tab shows the total number of spectra not counting Ampliter Ampifer2 AmpifiePRO ADC the current live spectrum stored in the High Voltage FieldData About Status Presets Detective memory The spectrum ID z i ove Spectra of the active spectrum is shown in the aj lower right either IDENT or SEARCH The spectrum ID is the eight character Move alphanumeric value assigned by the Detective when you store the spectrum see the Detective Administrator s Manual for more information on this 4 Stored Spectra SEARCH format Close There are two ways to store a Detective Figure 60 Detective Field Mode Spectrum Tab spectrum on disk The first is to use the Move button to read one or more spectra one at a time into MAESTRO or other application buffer windows after which you can save them to individual disk files The other is to download all stored spectra in a single operation using the Acquire Download Spectra command after which you can view them in buffer windows within your ORTEC CONNECTIONS application To move a spectrum from the stored memory to the active memory enter the spectrum number or use the up down arrow buttons to scroll through th
241. or this component click Have Disk return to the Local Area Connection Properties dialog Fig 15 Network Protocol AppleT alk Protocol DLC Protocol NetBEUI Protocol Network Monitor Driver NiwLink IP lt SPX NetBIOS Compatible Transport Protocol Have Disk Cancel Figure 14 Choose the Protocol Select NWLINK IPX as shown then Local Area Connection Properties ax click on Properties to open the dialog General shown in Fig 16 Connect using BY 3Com EtherLink Ill ISA 3C509 3C509b in Legacy mode Configure Components checked are used by this connection S File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Y Internet Protocol TCP IP Y Internet Protocol TCP IP b Uninstall Properties Description An implementation of the IPX and SPX protocols which are used by NetWare networks Show icon in taskbar when connected OK Cancel Figure 15 LAN Properties 10 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION NWLink IPX SPX NetBIOS Compatible Transport Proba 4 Je Set the Frame type to 802 3 as shown then click on OK and return to the Windows General desktop Specify an internal network number if you plan to run File and Print Services for NetWare IPX routing or any other NetWare service that relies on the SAP Agent This number applies to all connections on this computer that use such serv
242. otage FieldData Power About Status Presets gt Uncertainty 3600 00 Real Time Preset in Live Time Start Chan fo ROI Peak Width rT ROI Integral Suggest Region P Overflow Figure 155 DART Presets Tab 139 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample might be better than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Re
243. ote that if you selected Transistor Reset as the Preamplifier Type for this DSPEC the optimization buttons do not perform the pole zero As with any system the DSPEC should be optimized any time the detector is replaced or if the flattop width or cusp parameter is changed For optimization to take place the DSPEC must be processing pulses The detector should be connected in its final configuration before optimizing is started There should be a radioactive source near the detector so that the count rate causes a dead time of 5 Dead time is displayed on the DSPEC front panel and on the Status Sidebar during data acquisition Select either the Resistive Feedback or Transistor Reset option and click on Start Auto optimize This optimize command is sent to the DSPEC and if the DSPEC is able to start the operation a series of short beeps sounds to indicate that optimization is in progress When optimizing is complete the beeps stop During optimization pole zeroes are performed for several rise time values and the DSPEC is cycled through all the rise time values for the determination of the optimum tilt values As all of 118 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS the values for all the combinations are maintained in the DSPEC the optimize function does not need to be repeated for each possible rise time The optimization can take from 1 to 10 minutes depending on count rate You should repeat the optimization if the flattop width or the cusp setti
244. out Tab 79 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 7 6 Presets Figure 97 shows the Presets tab A Properties preset can only be set on a Detector that is not acquiring data during acquisition the preset field back Real Time grounds are gray indicating that they are inactive Live Time Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets Enter either the Real Time or Live Time preset in units of seconds and fractions of a second This value is stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the Detector clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the Detector is available to accept another pulse i e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the Detector is not available Figure 97 DSP Scint Presets Tab To disable a preset enter a value of zero If both presets are disabled data acquisition will continue until manually stopped The values of all presets for the currently selected Detector are shown on the application s Status Sidebar 3 2 8 microBASE 3 2 8 1 Amplifier Figure 98 shows the Amplifier tab Properties o xi which contains the Gain control Amplifier abc Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets spe Loa r Gain 0 94 The amplifier coarse gain is auto 0 70 1 70 matically set by the PMT being used CIA This tab allows you to adju
245. parameters and adjust them interactively while collecting live data To access the InSight mode go to the InSight section on the Amplifier 2 tab and click on Start Note that the Amplifier 2 tab graphically presents a modeled shape This is not a sampled waveform of the actual pulse shape only a model based on the current parameters The modeled shape is nominally a quasi trapezoid whose sides and top can be adjusted by the controls in this dialog While a particular control is being adjusted the model is updated to represent the changes made The Rise Time value is for both the rise and fall times thus changing the rise time has the effect of spreading or narrowing the quasi trapezoid symmetrically The Flattop controls adjust the top of the quasi trapezoid The Width adjusts the extent of the flattop from 0 3 to 2 4 us The Tilt adjustment varies the flatness of this section slightly The Tilt can be positive or negative Choosing a positive value results in a flattop that slopes downward choosing a negative value gives an upward slope Alternatively the optimize feature on the Amplifier tab can set the tilt value automatically This automatic value is normally the best for resolution but it can be changed on this dialog and in the InSight mode to accommodate particular throughput resolution tradeoffs The optimize feature also automatically adjusts the pole zero setting The dead time per pulse is 3 x Rise Time 2 x Flattop Wid
246. pled waveform in the digital processing units on a reference graticule The Properties dialog remains active and can be used to change settings as you view the pulses Because none of the traditional analog signals are available in digital spectrometers such as our DSPEC Pro DSPEC jr 2 0 DSPEC jr digiDART this mode is the only way to display the equivalent amplifier output pulse Note that at the bottom of the window the marker channel is displayed in units of time InSight digiDART s n 241 Calibration source 1714 File Acquire Calculate Services ROI Display Als eD 214 C ws a Coo ae 2 dada sm 241 Trigger LLO y l Single Reset Delay 73 60 E Baseline Restorer Auto E8 ys Fast Slow up jo y Pole Zero Auto 2064 4 Other Controls DRTEC 11 00 45 AM Ono o Marker 500 50 00 pS Mcb Model No DDAR 002 Figure 227 digiDART InSight Mode 198 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS The display can be switched from the current Detector to another Detector or buffer window The other Detector will be displayed in its most recent mode pulse height analysis PHA or InSight Buffer windows are always in PHA mode When you return to the current MCB the display will return to the InSight mode This also holds true if you exit the application while in InSight mode on next startup this MCB will still be in InSight mode 3 3 1 Exiting InSight To exit the InSight mode
247. ponential decay time constant of the preamplifier output with an oscilloscope The exponential decay time constant is the time taken for the pulse at the preamplifier output to decay to 1 e 0 368 of its initial value This known or measured value for the decay time constant must be converted to the corresponding pole zero value to be entered in the Pole Zero field Compute the value to be entered from the following equation 76 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Pole Zero 42 53 t 158 44 where q is the exponential decay time constant in microseconds Enter a number between 0 and 4095 which will correspond to decay time constants from 3 725 us to 100 us according to the relationship t 0 02351 Pole Zero 3 725 Example For a typical 50 us decay time constant you will enter the number 1968 To make a fine adjustment of the Pole Zero setting 1 Use a radioactive source that produces a well defined peak near the upper limits of the energy spectrum At low counting rates note the symmetry of the peak 2 Move the source closer to the detector to achieve much higher counting rates If the peak maintains the symmetry observed at low counting rates no further adjustment of the Pole Zero is needed If high counting rates generate a tail on the high energy side of the peak slightly decrease the pole zero value until the tail disappears If high counting rates generate a tail on the low energy side of the peak slightly increase the pole zer
248. proper E ae Live Ti calculation of the activity in the Aia sample with the least activity But if ROI Peak the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time HAUSA could be high resulting in a long M Overflow counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level Figure 169 919 Presets Tab samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI peak count In this circumstance the ROI Peak preset can be viewed as a safety valve The values of all presets for the currently selected MCB are shown on the Status Sidebar These values do not change as new values are entered on the Presets tab the changes take place only when you Close the Properties dialog Enter the Real Time and Live Time presets in units of seconds and fractions of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which ca
249. pters Bindings Network Adapters 1 3Com Etherlink 111 PCI Bus Master Adapter 302590 Add Remove Properties Update ltem Notes 3Com Etherlink 111 PCI Bus Master Adapter 302590 Cancel Figure 234 The Network Dialog Adapter Tab 215 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual A 4 2 Protocol On the Network dialog click on the Protocols tab to open the dialog shown in Fig 235 If the NWLink IPX SPX Compatible Transport or NWLink NetBIOS protocol is not listed it needs to be added To add the NWLink IPX SPX Compatible Transport protocol to the list click on Add to display the Select Network Protocol dialog shown in Fig 236 Click on NWLink IPX SPX Compatible Transport then click on OK to return to the Network dialog 216 Network 2 xi Identification Services Protocols Adapters Bindings Network Protocols Y NetBEUI Protocol J NWLink IPX SPX Compatible Transport Y TCP IP Protocol Properties E Remove Update m Description 4 nonroutable protocol designed for use in small LANs DK Cancel Figure 235 The Network Dialog Protocols Tab Select Network Protocol 121x Click the Network Protocol that you want to install then click OK IF gt qu you have an installation disk for this component click Have Disk Network Protocol AppleTalk Protocol DLC Protocol NetBEUI Protocol IS NA Compa
250. ption will be displayed When MCB Configuration runs the resulting MCB configuration list is normally broadcast to all PCs on the network If you do not want to broadcast the results unmark the Update detector list on all systems checkbox under the instrument list see Fig 31 so the configuration will be saved only to the local PC 21 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The first time the system is configured Fig 33 will be displayed to remind you that all new instruments must be assigned a unique non zero ID number This is the first time you have configured these detectors All detectors must have an ID number Since none of your detectors have ID numbers it is recommended that you press Renumber All to establish initial ID numbers for your detectors Figure 33 MCB Numbering First Time You can change all the instrument numbers by clicking on Renumber All to assign new numbers in sequence or click on Renumber New to renumber just the new instruments Figure 34 will be displayed if the list is a mixture of old and new numbers NOTE Remember that some applications use the instrument number to refer to a specific MCB or device e g the JOB file command SET_DETECTOR 5 Therefore you might want to subsequently avoid changing its number so all defined processes will still operate See your application software manual for additional information You have chosen to Renumber All of your detectors ev
251. r The Center Chan o Center Char 0 Stabilizer tab Fig 78 shows the Width 1 Width 1 current values for the stabilizers oe Se x uggest hegion uggest hegion The value in each Adjustment i Adjustment Initialize 0 Adjustment Initialize 0 section shows how much adjustment is currently applied The Initialize buttons set the adjustment to 0 If the value approaches 90 or above the Close amplifier gain should be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue to function Figure 78 DSPEC jr 2 0 Stabilizer Tab 64 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS when the adjustment value reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROL the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay enabled even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 3 2 5 6 High Voltag
252. r is in an ROI the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay active even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 3 2 11 4 High Voltage Figure 128 shows the High Voltage tab which allows you to turn the high voltage on or off set and monitor the voltage select the Polarity and choose the ShutDown mode 113 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual The high voltage is overridden by the detector bias remote shutdown signal from the detector high voltage cannot be enabled 1f the remote shutdown or overload signals prevent it Enter the detector high voltage in the Target field click On and monitor the voltage in the Actual field Click the Off button to turn off the high voltage The Polarity selection determines which of the two rear panel HV connectors have power The blue or negative connector only has high voltage when is selected and the red or positive connector only has high voltage when is selected Choose the Polarity with the and radio buttons the high voltage is disabled when the polarity is being changed 3 2 11 5 About This tab Fig 129 displays hardware and firmware information a
253. ra to the other type and lt Shift F3 gt switches only the compare spectrum This allows you to make all types of comparisons Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to 16384 the energy scale will be divided into 16384 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings for the DSPEC Pro Upper and Lower Level Discriminators In the DSPEC Pro the lower and upper level discriminators are under computer control The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for storage 3 2 4 4 Stabilizer The DSPEC Pro has both a gain x stabilizer and a zero stabilizer The UN High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset Stabilizer tab Fig 68 shows the Amplifier Amplfier2 AmpliierPRO ADC Stabilizer current values for the stabilizers E ee ta om P T iGain Stabilization Enabled f Zero Stabilization Enabled The value in each Adjustment A e e eta section shows how much adjustment a ie CN is currently applied The Initialize width 1 Width 1 buttons set the adjustment to 0 If the Su
254. range of 0 3 to 1 0 The resulting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section The two controls used together cover the entire range of amplification from 3 0 to 1000 0 Shaping Time Use the Shaping Time droplist to select the DART amplifier pulse shaping time constant The displayed values are the values available for this DART The selections are usually either 1 and 6 us or 1 and 2 us Preamplifier Type and Pole Zero The Preamplifier Type section lets you choose Transistor Reset or Resistive Feedback preamplifier operation The DART amplifier is equipped with an automatic pole zero circuit If Transistor Reset is selected for this DART the pole zero is not needed 132 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS When the Resistive Feedback option is selected you must set the pole zero To do this go to the Pole Zero section of the dialog and click on Start Auto The pole zero command will be sent to the DART and if the DART is able to start the pole zero a series of short beeps will sound to indicate that the pole zero is in progress When the pole zeroing is finished the beeps will stop As with any system the amplifier should be pole zeroed any time the detector is changed or the shaping time of the amplifier is changed Pole zeroing requires the amplifier to be amplifying pulses The detector should be connected in the final configuration before pole zeroing is started There should be a radioactive source near the detector so that t
255. rates at a fixed Conversion Gain E conversion gain of 32768 channels and Lower Level Disc 50 H the LLD and ULD cannot be adjusted Upper Level Disc t63 y 3 2 1 5 Stabilizer The trans SPEC has both a gain Flea Tine te stabilizer and a zero stabilizer 0 00 0 00 Count Rate 727 The Stabilizer tab Fig 39 shows the current values for the stabilizers Figure 38 trans SPEC ADC Tab The value in each Adjustment section shows how much adjustment is cur rently applied The Initialize buttons set the adjustment to 0 If the value approaches 90 or above the amplifier Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuciide Report gain should be adjusted so the stabilizer Ampifier Ampifier2 Amplifier PRO ADC Stablizer High Votage Properties for transSPEC can continue to function when the Zero Stabilization Enabled adjustment value reaches 100 the Center Chan 5 Center Chan 5 stabilizer cannot make further correc wid e wane tions in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the _ Suggest Region _ Suggest Region peak currently used for stabilization oe E Initialize 0 Initialize 0 To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads Figure 39 trans SPEC Stabilizer Tab the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROI the limits of the ROI are used If th
256. re range of amplification from 0 33 to 99 99 117 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Baseline Restore The Baseline Restore is used to return the baseline of the pulses to the true zero between incoming pulses This improves the resolution by removing low frequency noise such as de shifts or mains power ac pickup The baseline settings control the time constant of the circuit that returns the baseline to zero There are three fixed choices Auto Fast and Slow The fast setting 1s used for high count rates the slow for low count rates Auto adjusts the time constant as appropriate for the input count rate The settings Auto Fast or Slow are saved in the DSPEC even when the power is off You can view the time when the baseline restorer is active on the InSight display as a Mark region see the discussion on Marks p 200 In the automatic mode the current value is shown on the InSight sidebar Fig 227 For a low count rate system the value will remain at about 90 Preamplifier Type Use the Preamplifier Type section to choose Transistor Reset or Resistive Feedback preamplifier operation Your choice will depend on the preamplifier supplied with the type of germanium detector being used Optimize The DSPEC is equipped with both automatic pole zero logic and automatic flattop logic The Start Auto optimize button uses these features to automatically choose the best pole zero and flattop tilt settings N
257. red in Step 4 the maximum Width is 255 channels If you wish use the Suggest button 6 If you have already used the resolution enhancer you can either use the previously established settings which will go into effect when you turn on the enhancer in Step 7 or click on Initialize to clear all settings Initialization does not change the current Center channel and Width 7 Return to the PRO tab and turn on the resolution enhancer 8 Clear the MCB re start acquisition and monitor the FWHM of the target peak until it no longer changes Typically the more charge trapping exhibited by the detector the longer the data collection time 50 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 9 When you are satisfied that the FWHM has reached the best possible value clear the MCB and collect another spectrum for confirmation 10 At this point the resolution enhancer is now trained for the current peak shape parameters and can be turned off You can leave it on if you wish but you might notice some peak broadening 11 If you change any parameters that affect peak position and or shape you must repeat this training procedure 3 2 4 3 ADC This tab Fig 67 contains the Gate ZDT Mode Conversion Gain Lower Level Discriminator and Upper Level Discriminator controls In addition the current real time live time and count rate are monitored at the bottom of the dialog Gate The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating
258. reduce the rise time for higher throughput with somewhat worse resolution m InSight Start Stop 3009 Use the up down arrows to adjust the Figure 65 DSPEC Pro Amplifier 2 Tab Rise Time within the range of 0 8 to 23 0 us After all the controls have been adjusted return to the Amplifier tab and click on Start Auto The most recent settings are saved in the DSPEC Pro firmware even when the power is turned off For the more advanced user the InSight mode allows you to directly view all the parameters and adjust them interactively while collecting live data To access the InSight mode go to the Insight section on the Amplifier 2 tab and click on Start The InSight mode is discussed in more detail in Section 3 3 section Note that the Amplifier 2 tab graphically presents a modeled shape This is not a sampled waveform of the actual pulse shape only a model based on the current parameters The modeled shape is nominally a quasi trapezoid whose sides and top may be adjusted by the controls in this dialog While a particular control is being adjusted the model is updated to represent the changes made The Rise Time value is for both the rise and fall times thus changing the rise time has the effect of spreading or narrowing the quasi trapezoid symmetrically The Flattop controls adjust the top of the quasi trapezoid The Width adjusts the extent of the flattop from 0 3 to 2 4 us The Tilt adjustment varies the
259. reset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample might be lower than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROI the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command which is discussed in Section 3 7 Note that the Suggest Region button is not displayed during data acquisition Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 93 ORTEC MCB CONN
260. resets during acquisition the preset field backgrounds are gray indicating that 300 00 Real Time they are inactive You can use any R or all of the presets at one time To gi i disable a preset enter a value of zero ROLPeak If you disable all of the presets data ROI Integral acquisition will continue until manually stopped T Overflow NOTE The presets on this tab do not affect the Detective when Figure 63 Detective Presets Tab the instrument is operating in standalone configuration disconnected from the PC When operating as a standalone identifier and the ID button is pressed the Detective will always continue to take data until the Stop button is pressed When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the Detector to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the 44 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active sa
261. rite Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode MMCA 902 248 PHA Close Figure 225 MiniMCA 166 About Tab 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 2 29 8 Presets Figure 226 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled x set to a non zero value the first Amplifier Amplfier2 ADC Stabiizer HighVoltage condition met during the acquisition Power About Presets causes the MCB to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples Real Time of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient ot Integral counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be Figure 226 MiniMCA 166 Presets Tab high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Integral preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samples will be counted for the ROI total count In this circumstance the ROI Integral preset
262. rt Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROL the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command which 105 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual is discussed in Section 3 7 Note that the Suggest Region button is not displayed during data acquisition Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 10 10 MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 122 can monitor up to 20 nuclides at one time and stops data collection when the minimum detectable activity for each of the user specified MDA nuclides reaches the designated value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammaVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA a y b cxCounts Live time Eff x Yield The coefficients a b and c are det
263. ry The spectrum ID of the active spectrum is shown in the lower right The stored spectra cannot be viewed or stored on the PC until they are moved to the active spectrum position To move a spectrum from the stored memory to the active memory enter the spectrum number and click on Move Use the up down arrow buttons to scroll through the list of spectra The label on the lower right does not update until a spectrum is moved Note that this only 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Power About Status Presets Amplifier ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage Field Data Move Spectra Enter Erit 0 Stored Spectra Figure 151 DART Field Mode Tab moves the spectrum inside the DART To save the stored spectrum to the PC disk move it to the active position and use the File Save commands in your application Use the Acquire Download Spectra command to download all the stored spectra and save them to disk automatically They can then be viewed in a buffer window 3 2 14 6 Power The Power tab is shown in Fig 152 This tab displays information about the DART s current power source its power mode and voltage of the two batteries The power Source can be Battery 1 Battery 2 or External The DART internal hardware automatically switches from a discharged battery to the good battery The discharged battery can then be replaced without turning off the power or stopping operation DART s advanced power m
264. s Note that 1f you selected Transistor Reset as the Preamplifier Type for this DSPEC Pro the optimize button does not perform the pole zero As with any system the DSPEC Pro should be optimized any time the detector is replaced or if the flattop width is changed For optimization to take place the DSPEC Pro must be processing pulses The detector should be connected in its final configuration before optimizing is started There should be a radioactive source near the detector so that the count rate causes a dead time of 5 Dead time is displayed on the DSPEC Pro front panel and on the Status Sidebar during data acquisition Select either the Resistive Feedback or Transistor Reset option and click on Start Auto The optimize command is sent to the DSPEC Pro at this time and if the DSPEC Pro is able to start the operation a series of short beeps sounds to indicate that optimization is in progress When optimizing is complete the beeping stops During optimization pole zeroes are performed for several rise time values and the DSPEC Pro 1s cycled through all the rise time values for the determination of the optimum tilt values As all of the values for all the combinations are maintained in the DSPEC Pro the optimize function does not need to be repeated for each possible rise time The optimization can take from 1 to 10 minutes depending on count rate You should repeat the optimization if you change the flattop width The effect of opt
265. s the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample might be better than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROI the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command which is discussed in Section 3 7 Note that the Suggest Region button is not displayed during data acquisition Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 130 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 2 13 6 MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 146 stops data collection when the minimum detectable activity for a single user specified MDA nuclide reaches the designated value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammaVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA a y b cxCounts Live time Eff x Yield The coeffici
266. s of a second These values are stored internally with a resolution of 20 milliseconds ms since the MCB clock increments by 20 ms Real time means elapsed time or clock time Live time refers to the amount of time that the MCB is available to accept another pulse 1 e is not busy and is equal to the real time minus the dead time the time the MCB is not available Enter the ROI Peak count preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample might be better than the preset value Use the Sta
267. s read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calculated in the MCB given the values a b c Live time Eff and Yield The calculated value is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition is stopped Coefficients A B and C can be entered as numbers If the application such as GammaVision supports MDA calculations you can click on the Suggest button to enter from an internal table the values for the MDA type selected The MDA type should be chosen before the preset is selected here 116 Select the Nuclide and Energy from the droplists The Nuclide list contains all the nuclides in the working library The Energy list shows all the gamma ray energies for the selected nuclide in the library If the application supports efficiency calibration and the DSPEC Plus is efficiency calibrated the MDA is entered in the units selected in the application If the unit is not efficiency calibrated e g in MAESTRO which does not support efficiency calibration the MDA field is labeled 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS x Amplifier Ampliier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage About Presets MDA Preset Add New Update Delete Nuclide 0 0000 Cd 109 22 16 150 0000 Cs 137 31 82 MDA Preset MDA
268. s set at the factory so that a 10 MeV alpha particle corresponds to a 10 V output All amplifier connections are internal to the system 178 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Table 1 shows the offset and gain settings with the spectrum size set to 512 channels for some commonly used spectrum energy ranges The energy range can be the same for all inputs different for all inputs or any combination in between Each input has its own energy calibration in the system These are only examples any other combination can be used Table 1 Offset and Conversion Gain Settings Starting Ending Offset Conversion Energy Energy Gain MeV MeV 3 0 5 5 2048 3 0 8 0 1024 4 0 6 5 2048 4 0 9 0 1024 5 0 7 5 2048 6 0 8 5 2048 Spectrum size is 512 channels 3 2 26 2 About This tab Fig 204 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selected 920 or 920E as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the MCB is currently locked with a password Read Write indicates that the MCB is unlocked Read Only means it is locked 3 2 26 3 Presets Figure 205 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set on an MCB that Properties x ADC About Presets Counting Lab 920 MCB 1 Sample Acquisition Start Time Access 18 17 25 Wednesday April 17 2019 Read Write Firmware Revision
269. s the spectrum inside the MicroONOMAD To save the stored spectrum to the PC disk move it to the active position and use the File Save commands in your application Use the Acquire Download Spectra command to download all the stored spectra and save them to disk automatically They can then be viewed in a buffer window 3 2 24 5 About This tab Fig 196 displays hardware and firmware information about the Amplfier ADC Stabilizer Field Data About Presets currently selected MicroNOMAD as SINGLEY_LIZ MCB 9 well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows AAA whether the MCB is currently locked os Acquisition Start Time Access 1th rd R rite indi wile password ead Write indicates 13 50 27 Thursday November 07 2002 Read Write that the MCB is unlocked Read Only F ne EN Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode means it is locked uNOM 003 Unknown PHA 3 2 24 6 Presets Close Figure 197 shows the Presets tab The Figure 196 MicroNOMAD About Tab presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be
270. se that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 151 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 17 6 919E Uncertainty Preset The 919E includes an Uncertainty preset on the Presets tab see Fig 164 page 146 for an example of this preset s data fields The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample might be better than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker
271. select the preamplifier input signal polarity for the signal from the detector Normally GEM p type detectors have a positive signal and GMX n type have a negative signal Baseline Restore The Baseline Restore is used to return the baseline of the pulses to the true zero between incoming pulses This improves the resolution by removing low frequency noise such as de shifts or mains power ac pickup The baseline settings control the time constant of the circuit that returns the baseline to zero There are three fixed choices Auto Fast and Slow The fast setting is used for high count rates the slow for low count rates Auto adjusts the time constant as appropriate for the input count rate The settings Auto Fast or Slow are saved in the DSPEC Plus even when the power is off The time constant can be manually set on the InSight display see Section 3 3 You can view the time when the baseline restorer is active on the InSight display as a Mark region see the discussion on Marks p 200 In the automatic mode the current value is shown on the InSight sidebar Fig 227 For a low count rate system the value will remain at about 90 Preamplifier Type Use the Preamplifier Type section to choose Transistor Reset or Resistive Feedback preamplifier operation Your choice will depend on the preamplifier supplied with the type of germanium detector being used Optimize The DSPEC Plus is equipped with both automatic pole zero logic a
272. ser might wish to select MCB Properties and click on the InSight section s Start button to adjust the shaping parameters interactively with a live waveform showing the actual pulse shape or just to verify that all is well Section 3 3 provides detailed instructions on using the InSight mode 111 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 11 3 ADC This tab Fig 126 contains the Gate Properties x ZDT Mode Conversion Gain Lower mney RE MDA Preset Level Discriminator and Upper Level Amplifier Ampifier2 ADC Stabilizer L High Voltage Discriminator controls In addition the Gate Conversion Gain HA current real time live time and count Ott y 5 Lower Level Disc 110 rate are monitored at the bottom of the ZDT Mode ii 3 dialo g CORR_ERR Upper Level Disc ft 6383 H Gate l en Real Time Live Time The Gate control allows you to select a 10 00 10 00 o Count Rate 0 logic gating function With this function Off no gating is performed that is all Close detector signals are processed with the Figure 126 DSPEC Plus ADC Tab function in Coincidence a gating input signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak detect peak maximum ZDT Mode Use this droplist
273. sets MDA Preset MDA Preset Nucl be chosen before the preset is selected MDA Preset Coefficients here Correction cA A 0 000000 Nuclide fs B 0 000000 Select the Nuclide and Energy from Energy y keY C 0 000000 the droplists The Nuclide list contains all the nuclides in the working library The Energy list shows all the gamma ray energies for the selected nuclide in the library Figure 112 DSPEC jr MDA Preset Tab If the application supports efficiency calibration and the MCB is efficiency calibrated the MDA is entered in the units selected in the application If the unit is not efficiency calibrated e g in MAESTRO which does not support efficiency calibration the MDA field is labeled Correction the efficiency Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset operates as before If the Correction 94 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS factor 1s the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA preset will function normally 3 2 10 digiDART 3 2 10 1 Amplifier Figure 113 shows the Amplifier tab This tab contains the controls for Gain Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report Baseline Restore Preamplifier Type Amplifier Ampifier2 ADC Stabiizer HighVoltage Input Polarity and op timization Be r Gain 1 87 Baseline Restore Optimize sure that all of the controls on the tabs 0 45 100 T y Start Auto have been set before clicking the Start
274. shutdown or overload signals prevent it Enter the detector high voltage in the Target field click On and monitor the voltage in the Actual field Click the Off button to turn off the high voltage Properties for RANDT266 MCB 132 s x Amplifier Amplifier2 AmplifiePRO ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset i i Target O Volts Off Actual 0 Volts Shutdown Sodium lodide Detector Overload Close Figure 69 DSPEC Pro High Voltage Tab The shutdown can be ORTEC TTL or SMART The ORTEC mode is used for all ORTEC detectors except SMART 1 detectors Use the SMART option for those detectors Check with the detector manufacturer for other detectors The TTL mode is used for most non ORTEC detectors The high voltage in the DSPEC Pro is supplied by the SMART 1 module or in a separate DIM The recommended HV for SMART 1 is displayed on the dialog For other detectors see the detector manual or data sheet for the correct voltage The polarity is determined by the DIM or SMART 1 module To use a Sodium Iodide Detector mark the checkbox This changes the gain and zero stabilizers to operate in a faster mode For the DIM 296 the HV is controlled by the adjustment in the Model 296 and not here 53 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 4 6 About This tab Fig 70 displays hardware x and firmware information about the Amplifier Ampi
275. since the last time the SOH was cleared Temperature State of Health This is OK if the detector temperature has stayed below the high temperature limit set in the detector since the last time the SOH was cleared This is available only for SMART 1 detectors High Voltage State of Health This is OK if the HV supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 V of specified bias voltage since the last time the SOH was cleared Shutdown State of Health This is OK if the detector shutdown has not activated since the last time the SOH was cleared Preamplifier overload State of Health This is OK if the preamplifier overload has not activated since the last time the SOH was cleared Security State of Health This is OK if the security test was passed at the end of the last spectrum acquisition This is available only for SMART 1 detectors 67 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Power State of Health This is OK if the power to the DIM was constant during the last spectrum acquisition 24 volts This is the current value of the 24 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 12 volts This is the current value of the 12 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 12 volts This is the current value of the 12 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector 24 volts This is the current value of the 24 volt supply in the DIM as delivered to the detector High Voltage This is the current value
276. st overlap the pulse peak that is must start before the beginning of the flattop and stop after the end of the flattop for the pulse to be counted If the mode 1s set to Anticoincidence then the marked region will show the pulses that are accepted That is the rejected peaks will not be marked Simply put in all modes the accepted peaks are marked o Peak This is the peak detect pulse It indicates when the peak detect circuit has detected a valid pulse The Mark occurs about 1 5 us after the pulse maximum on the display 3 3 4 Shaping Parameter Controls On the lower right of the InSight sidebar are the shaping parameter controls The controls are split into two groups and the other controls button switches between them Not all DSP MCBs support all controls One group includes Rise Time Flattop Tilt and the Optimize button The Rise Time value is for both the rise and fall times thus changing the rise time has the effect of spreading or narrowing the quasi trapezoid symmetrically The Flattop controls adjust the top of the quasi trapezoid The Width adjusts the extent of the flattop for the adjustment range see the Amplifier 2 tab for this MCB The Tilt adjustment varies the slope of this section slightly The Tilt can be positive or negative Choosing a positive value results in a flattop that slopes downward choosing a negative value gives an upward slope Alternatively Optimize can set the tilt value automatically This
277. st the Fine fee Pa gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 7224 to 1 625 The resulting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section and depends on the PMT Close For Nal detectors the observed Figure 98 microBASE Amplifier Tab spectrum gain depends in part on the detector PMT pair and will vary 80 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS depending on the individual components If necessary the gain can also be adjusted by varying the HV applied to the PMT In some cases the HV will have to be adjusted to set the spectrum gain to the desired level 3 2 8 2 ADC This tab Fig 99 contains the Lower Level and Upper Level Discriminator controls In addition the current real time live time and count rate are monitored at the bottom of the dialog The Lower Level Discriminator sets the level of the lowest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes a lower level cutoff by channel number for ADC conversions The Upper Level Discriminator sets the level of the highest amplitude pulse that will be stored This level establishes an upper level cutoff by channel number for storage 3 2 8 3 Stabilizer The Stabilizer tab Fig 100 shows the current value for the gain stabilizer The value in the Adjustment section shows how much adjustment is currently applied The Initialize buttons set the adjustment to 0 If the value approaches 90 or above the
278. t remove the high voltage This function is overridden by the detector bias On Tagtf 0 vots remote shutdown signal from the Off detector high voltage cannot be enabled if the remote shutdown or overload signals prevent it The Target voltage level is displayed on this tab but cannot be modified from the dialog It is controlled by the hardware and is adjusted by a rear panel potentiometer High voltage polarity is set with an Figure 143 92X II High Voltage Tab internal jumper See the hardware Off 128 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS manual for more information 3 2 13 4 About This tab Fig 144 displays hardware x and firmware information about the Amplfier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets MDA Preset currently selected 92X II as well as R amp D 92 the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the MCB ong z p r is currently locked with a password E ds ies as Acquisition Start Time Access R Write indi hat the MCB i ead te indicates that t E CB is 22 45 12 Wednesday January 26 2000 Read Write unlocked Read Only means it is E l ie Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode locked 92X2 001 2EP PHA 3 2 13 5 Presets Close Figure 145 shows the Presets tab The Figure 144 92X II About Tab presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one
279. te by Figure 123 digiDART Nuclide Report Tab a user defined constant If the constant includes the efficiency and branching ratio the displayed value is the activity You enter the nuclide label and the activity units The report format and calculations are discussed in detail in Section 3 9 Add New Manual Add Nuclides can be added to the list using the library to assist in the region definition or manually To add a nuclide manually enter the nuclide name ROI start and end channels multiplicative factor and units in the Report section Now press Add New to add this nuclide to the list The units need only be entered once since they are the same for all nuclides in the table Library Add To use the library to aid in the definition select the nuclide from the library nuclide drop down list Now select the gamma ray energy from the Energy drop down list This defines what gamma ray to use Now Press the Select from Lib button in the Report section This will update 107 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual all the entries in this section and show as a yellow band the region to be used in both the expanded spectrum and the full window Now press Add New to add this nuclide to the list Edit To change any of the current nuclides select the nuclide in the list use the scroll bars 1f needed This will show the current settings for this nuclide Make any changes needed Any or all of the entries can be
280. tector State of Health reported as OK Or ERR e Gamma Dose Rate reported in mrem h or uSv h depending on user selected dose units see the Detective Operator Manual and indicating whether this reading was made with the detector Ge for low dose rates or the Geiger Miiller tube cm for high dose rates see Gamma Dose Rate Determination in the Detective Operator Manual for further discussion of the two dose rate meters Properties for SINGLEY_LIZ MCB 130 x Amplifier Amplfir2 AmpifiePRo ADC High Voltage FieldData About Status Presets State OfHeath OK Gamma Dose Rate y 004uSw h Ge Detector Temperature E OK Battery Voltage fi582vots oo Battery Time Remaining 149Min uv Bis m Henv Figure 62 Detective Status Tab e Detector Temperature reported as OK Or ERR 43 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual e Battery Voltage reported in volts e Battery Time Remaining in minutes e Cooler Body Temperature OK Or ERR e Cooler Drive Voltage OK or ERR e Cold Tip Temperature ox or ERR e HV Bias in volts To resolve status problems refer to the troubleshooting list in the hardware manual 3 2 3 9 Presets Figure 63 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set when Amplifier Amplifier2 AmplifierPRO abc the Detective is not acquiring data High Voltage FieldData About Status P
281. tector technology for more information on SMART 1 see the ORTEC catalog or visit www ortec online com and cannot be changed 3 2 3 6 Field Data Use this tab Fig 60 to view and or 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS High Voltage Field Data About Status Presets Amplifier Amplifier2 Amplifier PRO ADC Conversion Gain 4 Lower Level Disc p g Upper Level Disc jase Real Time Live Time 209 38 199 26 Count Rate 154 Figure 58 Detective ADC Tab Properties for SINGLEY_LIZ MCB 130 x Amplifier Amplifier2 AmplifierPRO aoc High Voltage Field Data About Status Presets A Target 2200 Volts off Actual 2200 Volts Shutdown SMART y On Polarity He 13 Figure 59 Detective High Voltage Tab save the spectra in the Detective s live and stored spectrum memory When you connect to the PC start MAESTRO or another ORTEC application and select the Detective from the detector droplist within the software the spectrum in the Detective s live spectrum memory will be displayed If you do not save this spectrum it will be lost overwritten when you start the next 41 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual data acquisition within the software application or use the Move button to read a spectrum from the Detective s stored spectrum memory to the live spectrum memory NOTE Moving and viewing stored spectra does not erase
282. ted DSPEC as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the MCB is currently locked with a password Read Write indicates that the MCB is unlocked Read Only means it is locked 3 2 12 7 Presets Figure 138 shows the Presets tab The presets can only be set on an MCB that is not acquiring data You can use any 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS xi Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage About Presets MDA Preset DSPE EP6 Sample ample 2 Acquisition Start Time Access 08 51 08 Thursday August 17 2000 Read Write Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode DSPE 004 EPG PHA Figure 137 DSPEC About Tab or all of the presets at one time To disable a preset enter a value of zero If you disable all of the presets data acquisition will continue until manually stopped When more than one preset is enabled set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long Ampl
283. ted in the final configuration before pole zeroing is started There should be a radioactive source near the detector so that the count rate will be high enough about 5 to 10 dead time to accomplish the pole zero in the proper time Without an oscilloscope connected to the amplifier output to display the pulse shape the effect of the pole zero operation is not always easy to see The most common effect of an incorrect pole zero setting is tailing on the peak shape in the spectrum Here tailing refers to abnormally high counts on either side of the peak If the amplifier was close to the proper pole zero setting before the operation the spectrum peak shape might not change enough to be seen 141 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 15 2 ADC This tab Fig 157 contains the Gate and x Conversion Gain controls In addition Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets the current real time and live time are PA Gate Conversion Gain monitored at the bottom of the dialog Ott Gate The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating function With this function Off no gating is performed that is all detector signals are processed with the function in Coincidence a gating input Close Real Time Live Time 60 00 60 00 signal must be present at the proper time Figure 157 92X NOMAD NOMAD Plus ADC Tab for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating i
284. ted value is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition is stopped 152 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Coefficients A B and C can be xi entered as numbers If the application ADC Stabilizer About Presets MDA Preset such as GammaVision supports MDA calculations you can click on the HDA Preset Nuclide _AddNew_ Suggest button to enter from an Update internal table the values for the MDA Delete type selected The MDA type should be MDA Preset Coefficients chosen before the preset is selected Conection c a 0 050000 here Nuclide 4g 110M y B 27 000000 Energy 446 80 y keV Ee o 000020 Select the Nuclide and Energy from the droplists The Nuclide list contains all the nuclides in the working library Figure 170 919E MDA Preset Tab The Energy list shows all the gamma ray energies for the selected nuclide in the library If the application supports efficiency calibration and the 919E is efficiency calibrated the MDA is entered in the units selected in the application If the unit is not efficiency calibrated e g in MAESTRO which does not support efficiency calibration the MDA field is labeled Correction the efficiency Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset operates as before If the Correction factor is the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA preset will function normally 3 2 18 921 and 921E The Model 921E has
285. th In the Pole Zero section the Start button performs a pole zero at the specified rise time and other shaping values Unlike the optimize feature it performs a pole zero for only the one rise time The pole zero Stop button aborts the pole zero and is normally not used When you are satisfied with the settings Close the Properties dialog and prepare to acquire data Once data acquisition is underway the advanced user might wish to select MCB Properties and click on the InSight section s Start button to adjust the shaping parameters interactively with a live waveform showing the actual pulse shape or just to verify that all is well Section 3 3 provides detailed instructions on using the InSight mode 86 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 2 9 3 ADC This tab Fig 106 contains the Gate Conversion Gain Lower Level Discriminator and Upper Level Discriminator controls In addition the current real time live time and count rate are monitored at the bottom of the dialog Gate The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating function With this function Off no gating is performed that is all detector signals are processed with the function in Coincidence a gating input signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond
286. that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROI the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay active even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 3 2 15 4 High Voltage Figure 159 shows the High Voltage tab The On and Off buttons apply and remove the high voltage This function is overridden by the detector bias remote shutdown signal from the detector high voltage cannot be enabled if the remote shutdown or overload signals prevent it The Target voltage level is displayed on this tab but cannot be modified from the dialog It is controlled by the hardware and can be adjusted by a rear panel potentiometer High voltage polarity is set with an internal jumper See the MCB hardware manual for more information xi Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets On Target 500 Volts Off Off Figure 159 92X NOMAD NOMAD Plus High Vo
287. the following h A 2 C 11 where A the gross counts in the ROI l the ROI low limit h the ROI high limit C the contents of channel i The adjusted gross area is the sum of all the channels marked by the ROI but not used in the background according to the following h 3 A EG 12 i 1 3 where Ay the adjusted gross counts in the ROI l the ROI low limit h the ROI high limit C the contents of channel i The net area is the adjusted gross area minus the adjusted calculated background as follows E B h 1 5 Al ee E ED n ag h 1 1 13 The uncertainty in the net area is the square root of the sum of the squares of the uncertainty in the adjusted gross area and the weighted error of the adjusted background The background uncertainty is weighted by the ratio of the adjusted peak width to the number of channels used to calculate the adjusted background Therefore net peak area uncertainty is given by 14 207 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual where Aag the adjusted gross area A thenetarea B the background area l the ROI low limit h the ROI high limit 3 8 Setting the Rise Time in Digital MCBs To achieve the best results for your application when using a digital spectrometer such as the DSPEC jr digiDART DSPEC Plus or DSPEC we recommend that you set the rise time of the pulses being processed by the digital filter The pulse rise time and also fa
288. tible Transport Streams Environment Have Disk OK Cancel Figure 236 Select IPX SPX Protocol On the Network dialog click once on NWLink IPX SPX Compatible Transport then on Configure to open a dialog similar to the one in Fig 237 Open the Adapter pull down list double click in the field or click once on the down arrow and select the adapter to be used Normally there will only be one adapter on the system Next select the Frame Type pull down list and click on Ethernet 802 3 The Internal Network Number should be left at the default value To complete this step and return to the Network dialog click on OK A 4 2 1 Services Click on the Services tab to display the dialog shown in Fig 238 APPENDIX A ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION INFORMATION NWLink IPX SPX Properties 2 x General If you are a member of a NetWare 3 1 or higher network with an Ethernet adapter card select 802 2 as the Frame Type If you are not sure select Auto Detect or contact pour network administrator Internal Network Number 00000003 Adapter 1 3Com Etherlink Ill Adapter 7 Frame Type Ethemet 802 3 Cancel Help Figure 237 Select Ethernet 802 3 Frame Type Network 2 xi Identification Services l Protocols Adapters Bindings Network Services 2l Computer Browser NetBIOS Interface RPC Configuration El Server Workstation Add Remove Properties
289. ting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the Detector in which case that Detector continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the Detector stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this Detector marked with an ROI reaches this value This has no function if no ROIs are marked in the Detector Marking the Overflow checkbox terminates acquisition when data in any channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 1 11 MDA Preset The MDA preset Fig 45 can monitor up to 20 nuclides at one time and stops data collection when the values of the minimum detectable activity MDA for all of the user specified MDA nuclides reach the needed value The MDA preset is implemented in the hardware The formulas for the MDA are given in various textbooks and in the Analysis Methods chapter in the GammaVision user manual and can be generally represented as follows MDA a y b cxCounts Live time Eff x Yield The coefficients a b and c are determined by the MDA formula to be used The Eff detector efficiency is determined from the calibration The Yield branching ratio is read from the working library using the nuclide and energy specified The MDA value is the one you have entered in the dialog Counts is the gross counts in the specified region and Live time is the live time The MDA value is calcu
290. tion when the adjustment value reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization Properties x Amplifier ADC Stabilizer About Presets Resecesoccocsecesecocsesesoccccoccesesoceccesossesecseseseson Center Chan o Width fi Suggest Region l Adjustment Initialize 0 Close Figure 200 MicroACE Stabilizer Tab To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROI the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay active even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 3 2 25 4 About This tab Fig 201 displays hardware and firmware information about the currently selected MicroACE as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition the Access field shows whether the MCB is currently locked with a password Read Write indicates that the MCB is unlocked Read Only means it is locked 176
291. tion With this function Off no gating is performed that is all detector signals are processed with the function in Coincidence a gating input Figure 193 MicroNOMAD ADC Tab signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak detect peak maximum Real Time Live Time 0 00 0 00 NOTE The Gate should be left Off because the MicroNOMAD gate control input is normally not accessible Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to 2048 the energy scale will be divided into 2048 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 2048 1024 512 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings for the MicroNOMAD 3 2 24 3 Stabilizer The MicroNOMAD has a gain stabilizer Gain stabilization is discussed in detail in Section 3 4 The Stabilizer tab Fig 194 shows the current gain stabilizer setting The value in the Adjustment section shows how much adjustment is currently applied The Initialize button sets the adjustment to 0 If the value approaches 90 or above the amplifier gain should be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue to function when the adjustment value reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make further corrections in that direction
292. tion Enabled Voltage tab Center Chan 0 Center Chan 0 Width f Width f1 The Stabilizer tab Fig 107 shows a sn the current values for the stabilizers The value in each Adjustment section cias a Batai z shows how much adjustment is cur ES AE E ME rently applied The Initialize buttons set the adjustment to 0 If the value approaches 90 or above the amplifier gain should be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue to function when the adjustment value reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization Figure 107 DSPEC jr Stabilizer Tab To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROL the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on Until changed in this dialog the stabilizer will stay enabled even if the power is turned off When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 3 2 9 5 High Voltage Figure 108 shows the High Voltage tab which allows you to turn the high voltage on or off set and monitor the voltage and choose
293. tion l Identification Access Control The following network components are installed El Client for Microsoft Networks El Client for Netware Networks S 3Com Etherlink Ill PCMCIA 30589305898 1 ompatible Protocol NETBIOS support for IPX SPX compatible Protocol File and printer sharing for Microsoft Networks Primary Network Logon Client for Microsoft Networks Se File and Print Sharing Description The IPXSPX compatible protocol is a protocol Netware and Windows NT servers and Windows 95 computers use to communicate DK Cancel Figure 3 The Network Dialog 2 1 1 1 Adapter Make sure the Ethernet adapter is on the list of installed components If not 1t must be added To add the Ethernet adapter to the list click on the Add button This will open the Select Network Component Type dialog Fig 4 Select Adapter and click on Add Add the adapter according to the hardware instructions When adapter setup is complete click on OK to return to the Network dialog 2 1 1 2 Protocol If IPX SPX compatible Protocol is not listed it needs to be added To do so click on Add This will again open the Select Network Com ponent Type dialog Click on Protocol and click on Add The Select Network Protocol dialog Fig 5 will open Under Manufacturers click on Microsoft Under Network Protocols click on IPX SPX compatible Protocol Click OK to add the protocol to the
294. to be used by your application s Note that as of September 2004 ORTEC has discontinued support for Windows 95 the original release of Windows 98 as distinguished from Windows 98 Second Edition which is still supported and NT ORTEC gives no assurance that our new CONNECTIONS 32 software or hardware will install and or function correctly on PCs using these operating systems Appendix A contains additional setup and configuration notes for special cases including some laptops and older PCs and for older systems the network protocol setup for Windows NT Windows 95 setup is the same as setup for Windows 98 SE see Section 2 1 1 2 1 Setting Up the Network Protocol This section describes how to select the right Windows 98 SE 2000 and XP protocols for CONNECTIONS 32 operation on a network ORTEC CONNECTIONS software will use all of the network languages called protocols supported by 32 bit Windows If multiple protocols are installed on the various PCs in the network only those PCs with compatible protocols will be able to communicate with one another No special settings are required in that case However CONNECTIONS products with built in Ethernet adapters such as the DSPEC Plus DSPEC ORSIM II or III OCTETE Plus 919E 920E 921E MatchMaker and 92X II communicate directly with the PCs on the network The PCs and these direct connect units must speak the same language i e use the same pro
295. to select Properties UU xi a logic gating function With this func Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets MDA Preset tion Off no gating is performed that iS ae Bee all detector signals are processed with Anticoncidence MN the function in Coincidence a gating input signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the Real Time Live Time conversion of the detector signal The 11 00 10 86 gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak Close detect peak maximum Figure 141 92X II ADC Tab Conversion Gain The Conversion Gain sets the maximum channel number in the spectrum If set to 16384 the energy scale will be divided into 16384 channels The conversion gain is entered in powers of 2 e g 8192 4096 2048 The up down arrow buttons step through the valid settings 3 2 13 3 Stabilizer The 92X II has both a gain stabilizer and a zero stabilizer These are discussed in detail in 127 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Sections 3 4 and 3 5 respectively The Stabilizer tab Fig 142 shows the Properties E current values for the stabilizers The Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets MDA Preset value in each Adjustment section shows how much adjustment is currently Gain Stabilization Enabl
296. tocol in order to understand each other If you are connected to instruments via a network and one or more of the MCBs on the network has a built in Ethernet adapter the network default protocol must be set to the following protocols on all PCs that use CONNECTIONS hardware e Windows 98 SE IPX SPX Compatible Transport with NetBIOS page 4 e Windows 2000 NWLink IPX SPX NetBIOS Compatible Transport Protocol page 7 e Windows XP NWLink IPX SPX NetBIOS Compatible Transport Protocol page 11 In addition in a network that has both 16 bit e g Windows 3 x and 32 bit Windows systems on it the 32 bit systems must use the IPX SPX protocol before they can communicate with any 16 bit system ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 2 1 1 Windows 98 SE Network Setup To use direct connect MCBs Windows 98 SE must use o gt the IPX SPX Compatible Transport with NetBIOS protocol y Documents As noted above systems without any direct connect Ethernet FAs settings 5 Control Panel devices can use any protocol Q Em a al 9 Help To check to see if the IPX SPX protocol is installed add it oo or set it as the default click on Start from the Windows E om Taskbar Next select Settings then Control Panel as shown y a r R ay Shut Down in Fig 2 MStar mS When the Control Panel opens double click on the a e e ono Network icon to open the Network dialog Fig 3 Network Network 2 px Configura
297. tored in the MCB memory 3 2 2 7 About This tab Fig 52 displays hardware and firmware information about the Amplifier Ampliier2 AmpifiePRO abc Detective EX as well as the data High Voltage Field Data About Status Presets Acquisition Start Time Sample Detective EX MCB 133 description is not used In addition the Access field shows whether the ee Detector is currently locked with a 222 q password Read Write indicates that E Acquisition Start Time Access the Detector is unlocked and Read 15 55 49 Tuesday April 13 2004 ReadAwite Only means it is locked Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode DETA 002 0 PHA Figure 52 Detective EX About Tab 36 3 2 2 8 Status Figure 53 shows the Status tab Nine parameters are continuously monitored in real time Satisfactory status 1s re ported as OK or as a numerical value A failure is reported as ERR Or a descriptive message Use the droplists to select any six parameters to be displayed simultaneously on the Status tab You can change the selected parameters at any time The monitored parameters are e Detector State of Health reported as OK Or ERR 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS Properties for Detective EX MCB 133 x Amplifier Ampifier2 AmplifierPRO aoc High Voltage FieldData About Status Presets Figure 53 Detective EX Status Tab e Gamma Dose Rate reported in mrem h or uSv h dependin
298. ts the pole zero setting The dead time per pulse is 3 x Rise Time 2 x Flattop Width In the Pole Zero section the Start button performs a pole zero at the specified rise time and other shaping values Unlike the optimize feature it performs a pole zero for only the one rise time The pole zero Stop button aborts the pole zero and is normally not used When you are satisfied with the settings Close the Properties dialog and prepare to acquire data Once data acquisition is underway the advanced user might wish to select MCB Properties and click on the InSight section s Start button to adjust the shaping parameters interactively with a live waveform showing the actual pulse shape or just to verify that all is well Section 3 3 provides detailed instructions on using the InSight mode 3 2 10 3 ADC This tab Fig 115 contains the Gate Conversion Gain Lower Level Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report Discriminator and Upper Level Amplifier Ampiifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVolage Discriminator controls In addition the Gas Conversion Gain REN current real time live time and count Ott M Lower Level Disc 50 rate are monitored at the bottom of the AR dialog Upper Level Disc 16383 o Gate M Real Time Live Time Count Rate 901 The Gate control allows you to select a logic gating function With this function Off no gating is performed that is all
299. u can mark or unmark the driver checkboxes as needed after which you must re run the MCB Configuration program as described above 2 2 2 Installing a CONNECTIONS 32 Driver Update Kit Included with an ORTEC Software or Hardware Product This section assumes that an ORTEC software application is already installed on your PC if not begin with Section 2 2 1 If you have received a CONNECTIONS 32 Driver Update Kit it is because ORTEC has updated the CONNECTIONS 32 driver since the release date of the ORTEC software product s you installed in Section 2 2 1 or You have purchased a recently released ORTEC CONNECTIONS 32 MCB that requires the installation of a CONNECTIONS 32 driver update before you can access your new instrument with ORTEC software applications 18 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION To install the CONNECTIONS 32 Driver Update 1 Insert the CONNECTIONS 32 Driver Update CD then go to the Windows Taskbar and click on Start and Run In the Run dialog enter D ConnectionsSetup exe use your CD ROM drive designator then click on OK This will start the installation wizard Click on Next and follow the wizard prompts 2 Return to Step 3 in Section 2 2 1 and follow the instrument setup and subsequent software installation steps After completion of the wizard restart and MCB configuration steps described in the preceding section your system will be ready to use 2 2 3 If You Have Windows XP Serv
300. u to insert the ORTEC CONNECTIONS 32 Driver Update CD Ignore this message and click on OK Figure 27 Window Menu Please insert the disk labeled ORTEC Installation CD and then click OK The second additional dialog could request a specific file see insert Disk a oi The file windrvr6 sys on ORTEC the example 1n Fig 3 28 Browse to 3 palos CE conc le found the c Program Files Common l Cancel Insert ORTEC Installation CD in the Files ORTEC Shared UMCBI folder selected drive and click OK not to the update CD then click on Skip File OK The installation wizard will ia hos Details resume copying files Common Files ORTEC Shared UMCBI F Browse Figure 28 Window Menu At the end of the wizard restart the PC to complete software installation Upon restart remove the update CD from the drive After all processing for new plug and play devices has finished you will be ready to configure the MCBs in your system Connect and power on all local and network ORTEC instruments that you wish to use as well as their associated PCs Otherwise the software will not detect them during installation Any instruments not detected can be configured at a later time 17 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 8 If any of the components on the network is a DSPEC Plus ORSIM II or II MatchMaker DSPEC 92X II 919E 920E 921E or other module that uses an Ethernet connecti
301. ue is compared with the MDA value on the dialog and when it is lower acquisition is stopped Coefficients A B and C can be entered as numbers If the application such as GammaVision supports MDA calculations you can click on the Suggest button to enter from an internal table the values for the MDA type selected The MDA type should be chosen before the preset is selected here Select the Nuclide and Energy from the droplists The Nuclide list contains ADC Stabilizer About Presets MDA Preset all the nuclides in the working library The Energy list shows all the gamma ray energies for the selected nuclide in the library Delete MDA Preset Nuclide MDA Preset Coefficients If the application supports efficiency Correction cA A 2 710000 calibration and the 921E is efficiency B Jo0o0000 Suge calibrated the MDA is entered in the c 21 700000 units selected in the application If the unit is not efficiency calibrated e g in Lose MAESTRO which does not support Figure 175 921E MDA Preset Tab efficiency calibration the MDA field is labeled Correction the efficiency Eff is set to 1 0 and the preset operates as before If the Correction factor is the actual MDA times the efficiency known from other sources the MDA preset will function normally 157 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual 3 2 19 TRUMP PCI 3 2 19 1 ADC This tab Fig
302. uggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields The center channel is the marker channel and the width is 4 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the Gain Stabilization Enabled checkbox to turn the stabilizer on The stabilizer will stay enabled even if the power is turned off until changed in this dialog When the stabilizer is enabled the Center Channel and Width cannot be changed 78 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 2 7 4 High Voltage Figure 95 shows the High Voltage Properties tab which allows you to turn the high voltage on or off Enter the detector high voltage in the Target field click Target 0 Vols On and monitor the voltage in the Actual 0 Volts Actual field Click the Off button to turn off the high voltage Figure 95 DSP Scint High Voltage Tab 3 2 7 5 About This tab Fig 96 displays hardware Properties and firmware information about the currently selected DSP Scint as well as the data Acquisition Start Time and Sample description In addition Amplifier ADC Stabilizer High Voltage About Presets MCB 512 the Access field shows whether the Sample Detector is currently locked with a password Read Write indicates that Acquisition Start Time Access the Detector is unlocked Read Only Unknown Read write means it is locked Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode dsCI 001 00402595 PHA Figure 96 DSP Scint Ab
303. ulses The detector should be connected in its final configuration before optimizing 1s started There should be a radioactive source near the detector so that the count rate causes a dead time of 5 Dead time is displayed on the DSPEC jr 2 0 front panel and on the Status Sidebar during data acquisition Select either the Resistive Feedback or Transistor Reset option and click on Start Auto The optimize command is sent to the DSPEC jr 2 0 at this time and if the DSPEC jr 2 0 is able to start the operation a series of short beeps sounds to indicate that optimization is in progress When optimizing is complete the beeping stops During optimization pole zeroes are performed for several rise time values and the DSPEC jr 2 0 is cycled through all the rise time values for the determination of the optimum tilt values As all of the values for all the combinations are maintained in the DSPEC jr 2 0 the optimize function does not need to be repeated for each possible rise time The optimization can take from 1 to 10 minutes depending on count rate You should repeat the optimization if you change the flattop width The effect of optimization on the pulse can be seen in the InSight mode on the Amplifier 2 tab Note however that if the settings were close to proper adjustment before starting optimization the pulse shape may not change enough for you to see In this situation you also may not notice a change in the shape of the spectrum peaks Th
304. unts 3 2 4 DSPEC Pro 3 2 4 1 Amplifier Figure 64 shows the Amplifier tab This tab contains the controls for Gain Baseline Restore Preamplifier Type Input Polarity and Optimize NOTE Be sure that all of the controls on the tabs have been set before clicking the Start Auto optimize button The changes you make on most property tabs take place immediately There is no cancel or undo for these dialogs Gain Set the amplifier coarse gain by selecting from the Coarse droplist then adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 45 to 1 00 The resulting effective 45 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual gain is shown at the top of the Gain Properties for RANDT266 MCB 132 N x section The two controls used together High Voltage About Status Presets MDA Preset cover the entire range of amplification Amplifier Amplifier2 Ampifier PRO ADC Stabiizer from 0 45 to 32 7 Gain 1 00 Baseline Restore m Optimize 0 45 1 00 Start Auto Input Polarity LA m Preamplifier Type Esteras The Input Polarity radio buttons Ee Resistor zme 7 Input Polaiy select the preamplifier input signal Coarse RAE ae polarity for the signal from the detector Normally GEM p type detectors have dl a positive signal and GMX n type have a negative signal Close Figure 64 DSPEC Pro Amplifier Tab Baseline Restore Th
305. unts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample might be better than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positioned in an ROL the start channel is 1 5 times the FWHM below the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM The net peak area and statistical 160 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS uncertainty are calculated in the same manner as for the MAESTRO Peak Info command which is discussed in Section 3 7 Note that the Suggest Region button is not display
306. ux to change while the acquisition is in progress yet the total counts recorded in each of the peaks are correct The resulting spectrum has no dead time at all in ZDT mode the data are corrected not the acquisition time Thus the net counts in a peak are divided by the real time to determine the count rate ZDT mode has a unique feature in that it can store both the corrected spectrum and the uncorrected spectrum or the corrected spectrum and the uncertainty spectrum The uncorrected spectrum also called the live time corrected LTC spectrum can be used to determine exactly how many pulses at any energy were processed by the spectrometer The corrected spectrum gives the best estimate of the total counts that would have been in the peak if the system were free of dead time effects The uncertainty spectrum can be used to calculate the counting uncertainty channel by channel in the corrected spectrum Patent number 6 327 549 204 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS NOTE When the spectrometer is placed in ZDT mode the throughput of the instrument is reduced somewhat as extra processing must be done on the spectrum therefore if the gamma ray flux is not changing as a function of time but absolute highest throughput is desirable you might wish to store only the LTC spectrum in the DSPEC Plus memory When ZDT counting is enabled in mode 0 ZDT Mode field set to NORM_CORR on the ADC tab the two spectra stored are the LTC spectrum li
307. value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when any ROI channel reaches this value unless there are no ROIs marked in the MCB in which case that MCB continues counting until the count is manually stopped Enter the ROI Integral preset value in counts With this preset condition the MCB stops counting when the sum of all counts in all channels for this MCB marked with an ROI reaches this value unless no ROIs are marked in the MCB The Uncertainty preset stops acquisition when the statistical or counting uncertainty of a user selected net peak reaches the value you have entered Enter the Preset in value as percent uncertainty at 1 sigma of the net peak area The range is from 99 to 0 1 in 0 1 steps You have complete control over the selected peak region The region must be at least 7 channels wide with 3 channels of background on each side of the peak As the uncertainty is calculated approximately every 30 seconds the uncertainty achieved for a high count rate sample might be better than the preset value Use the Start Channel and Width fields to enter the channel limits directly or click on Suggest Region If the marker is positioned in an ROI around the peak of interest Suggest Region reads the limits of the ROI with the marker and display those limits in the Start Chan and Width fields The ROI can be cleared after the preset is entered without affecting the uncertainty calculation If the marker is not positione
308. ve time and real time with dead time losses and the spectrum corrected for the dead time losses real time only Unfortunately in the analysis of the ZDT spectrum the uncertainty of the measurement cannot be determined using either spectrum In the second ZDT mode ZDT Mode field set to CORR_ERR on the ADC tab the estimation of the statistical uncertainty is stored in place of the LTC spectrum and is referred to as the error spectrum ERR In this mode the corrected spectrum is used to measure the counts in a peak and the error spectrum is used to determine the uncertainty of the measurement made in the corrected spectrum Table 3 shows which spectra are collected in the three possible modes For example if the area of a peak is measured in the corrected spectrum by summing channels 1000 to 1100 the variance of the measurement can be determined by summing the counts in channels 1000 to 1100 in the error spectrum Or shown another way the counts in channel 7 can be expressed as N i y V i with a 1 sigma confidence limit where N is the corrected spectral data and V is the variance error spectral data Table 3 ZDT Modes Mode Uncorrected ZDT Corrected ZDT Error Spectrum k Spectrum_ Spectrum _ ZDT Disabled Yes No No ZDT LTC Mode Yes Yes No ZDT ERR Mode No Yes Yes 3 7 The MAESTRO Peak Info Calculation A number of ORTEC MCBs support an uncertainty preset which requires that you select a peak This peak can be defined by 1
309. when this command is executed the old stabilization region is replaced by the new peak defined by the marker and stabilization continues using the new peak 202 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS The Gain Stabilizer Enabled checkbox enables or disables the gain stabilization It can only be turned on after the Suggest button has been used to select a working peak 3 5 Zero Stabilization Zero stabilization enables you to control the zero level or offset stabilizer on MCBs so equipped The zero level stabilizer uses a peak in the spectrum to monitor the changes in the zero level of the system amplifier The zero stabilizer controls the offset bias level so the peak will be maintained in its original position The input pulse height to channel number relationship is as in Eq 3 Changes in either the zero intercept or gain can affect the positions of all the peaks in the spectrum When used with the gain stabilizer both the zero intercept and the gain slope are monitored to keep all the peaks in the spectrum stabilized The zero stabilization and gain stabilization are separate functions in the MCB but both will affect the position of the peaks in the spectrum The stabilization operates by keeping a peak centered in an ROI you have defined The ROI should be set symmetrically about the center of a peak with reasonably good count rate in the lower channels of the spectrum The ROI should be about twice the FWHM of the peak If the region is too
310. x Amplifier ADC Stabilizer About Presets BAMBAM MCB 1 Sample sss Acquisition Start Time Access Unknown Read Write Firmware Revision Serial Number Acquisition Mode uACE 002 Unknown PHA Close Figure 201 MicroACE About Tab 3 MCB PROPERTIES DIALOGS 3 2 25 5 Presets Figure 202 shows the Presets tab The MEA x presets can only be set on an MCB that Amplifier ADC Stabilizer About Presets is not acquiring data You can use any or all of the presets at one time To Real Time disable a preset enter a value of zero Live Ti If you disable all of the presets data a acquisition will continue until manually ROI Peak stopped PP ROI Integral When more than one preset is enabled P Overflow set to a non zero value the first condition met during the acquisition causes the MCB to stop This can be useful when you are analyzing samples of widely varying activity and do not know the general activity before counting For example the Live Time preset can be set so that sufficient counts can be obtained for proper calculation of the activity in the sample with the least activity But if the sample contains a large amount of this or another nuclide the dead time could be high resulting in a long counting time for the sample If you set the ROI Peak preset in addition to the Live Time preset the low level samples will be counted to the desired fixed live time while the very active samp
311. x parameters to be displayed Detector State Of Health ERR Security Verification Error simultaneously on the Status tab normally these would be the six that DIM 24V State OfHeath Z OK are most important to you The items DIM 12v State Of Health m OK you select can be changed at any time DIM 12 State Of Health e OK DIM 24V State Of Heath 7 OK Two types of status responses are yP p Detector Temperature State Of y ERR displayed OK or ERR and a numeric value The state of health SOH parameters all respond with OK or ERR If the state is OK the parameter Figure 120 digiDART Status Tab stayed within the set limits during the spectrum acquisition If the parameter varied from the nominal value by more than the allowed limit the ERR is set until cleared by the program The numeric values are displayed in the units reported by the digiDART Security Detector temperature and Live detector temperature are available only for SMART 1 detectors For non SMART 1 detectors they respond with N A The parameters are Detector State of Health This is OK if all the SOH are OK and ERR if any one is ERR DIM 24V State of Health This is OK if the 24 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 24 volts since the last time the SOH was cleared DIM 12V State of Health This is OK if the 12 volt supply in the DIM has stayed within 200 mV of 12 volts since the last time the S
312. xisting Network Connections If no network entry is shown install the hardware and follow the instructions for new hardware then return to this screen Double click on the existing LAN entry to A e saie display the status dialog shown in Fig 20 E General Click on Properties to open the LAN A properties dialog Fig 21 Connection Status Connected Duration 1 day 18 54 21 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity J Sent Received Packets 1 714 1 230 Close Figure 20 LAN Connection Status 12 To add the NWLink IPX SPX NetBIOS Compatible Transport Protocol click on the Install button This will open the Select Network Component Type dialog Fig 22 Click on Protocol to display the Select Network Protocol dialog shown in Fig 23 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION Local Area Connection 2 Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using E9 3Com 3C905T based Ethernet Adapter Generic 2 This connection uses the following items Client for Microsoft Networks v a File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks 5 005 Packet Scheduler 3 Internet Protocol TCP IP Description Allows pour computer to access resources on a Microsoft network C Show icon in notification area when connected Figure 21 LAN Properties Select Network Component Type Click the type of network component pou want to install
313. y Properties About Status Presets MDA Preset Amplifier Amplfier2 ADC Stabilizer HighVoltage Gain 1 00 Baseline Restore Auto v Preamplifier Type Resistor Feedbact y Optimize Start Auto Stop Auto Input Polarity Fine 0 5000 Coarse x 2 He Cji Needs Auto Opti Figure 104 DSPEC jr Amplifier Tab selecting from the Coarse droplist then adjust the Fine gain with the horizontal slider bar or the edit box in the range of 0 45 to 1 00 The resulting effective gain is shown at the top of the Gain section The two controls used together cover the entire range of amplification from 0 45 to 100 83 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual Input Polarity The Input Polarity radio buttons select the preamplifier input signal polarity for the signal from the detector Normally GEM p type detectors have a positive signal and GMX n type have a negative signal Baseline Restore The Baseline Restore is used to return the baseline of the pulses to the true zero between incoming pulses This improves the resolution by removing low frequency noise such as de shifts or mains power ac pickup The baseline settings control the time constant of the circuit that returns the baseline to zero There are three fixed choices Auto Fast and Slow The fast setting is used for high count rates the slow for low count rates Auto adjusts the time constant as appropriate for the
314. y channel exceeds 2 1 over 2x10 counts 3 2 26 920 and 920E The Model 919E has more features than the 919 as explained beginning in Section 3 2 26 4 3 2 26 1 ADC This tab Fig 203 contains the Gate Conversion Gain and Digital Offset ADC About Presets controls In addition the current real Gate Sa E time and live time are monitored at the Off z o i bottom of the dialog Digital Offset O F Gate The Gate control allows you to select a Real Tine Live Tine logic gating function With this function 0 00 0 00 Off no gating is performed that is all detector signals are processed with Close the function in Coincidence a gating Figure 203 920 and 920E ADC Tab input signal must be present at the proper time for the conversion of the event in Anticoincidence the gating input signal must not be present for the conversion of the detector signal The gating signal must occur prior to and extend 500 nanoseconds beyond peak detect peak maximum Conversion Gain and Digital Offset The Digital Offset and Conversion Gain are used to control the starting energy and energy range of the spectrum collected In many cases the low energy portion of the spectrum contains no data of interest and can be discarded The 920 and 920E use digital offset in the MCB to accomplish this The conversion gain is the number of channels corresponding to a full scale input of 10 V In the 920 and 920E the amplifier gain i
315. zer These are discussed in detail in Sections 3 4 and 3 5 respectively The Stabilizer tab Fig 116 shows the current values for the stabilizers The Field Data About Status Presets MDA Preset Nuclide Report value in each Adjustment section Amplifier Amplifier2 ADC Stabilizer HighYoltage shows how much adjustment is currently amGiabizaionEnabled Zeto Stabiizaton Enabled applied The Initialize buttons set the Conver Chart 0 Center Chan 7 adjustment to 0 If the value approaches 90 or above the amplifier gain should width fi widths fi be adjusted so the stabilizer can continue Suggest Region Suggest Region to function when the adjustment value Adjustment Adjustment reaches 100 the stabilizer cannot make 0 Initialize 0 further corrections in that direction The Center Channel and Width fields show the peak currently used for stabilization Figure 116 digiDART Stabilizer Tab 99 ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS 32 Hardware Property Dialogs Manual To enable the stabilizer enter the Center Channel and Width values manually or click on the Suggest Region button Suggest Region reads the position of the marker and inserts values into the fields If the marker is in an ROI the limits of the ROI are used If the marker is not in an ROI the center channel is the marker channel and the width is 3 times the FWHM at this energy Now click on the appropriate Ena

ORTEC MCB CONNECTIONS Hardware Property Dialogs Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents